Skip to main content

Full text of "Musical instruments"

See other formats


I>:<^^: 


\mx\^i 


irN^^ 


\f 


;v 


Shelf  No. 

f>tf. 


FKOM  THl; 


^xntc  JPttnd. 


H.lU,„K,tU,t, 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

PART    I,— Issue,   180   copies 

"  The  Irish  and  the  Highland  Harps  " 

On  receipt  of  £3  for  each  volume,  a  limited  number  of  copies 

will  be  forwarded  to  private  individuals,  or  to  Booksellers,  free  in 

the  United  Kingdom. 

ROBERT  B.   ARMSTRONG, 

6  Randolph  Cliff, 

Edinburgh. 


OPINIONS    OF    THE     PRESS. 

THE    ATHEN.a:UM,   22nd  July  1905. 

"It  is  hard  to  overestimate  the  service  clone  both  to  archwologists  and  musi- 
cians by  this  admirable  monograph  on  tlie  relics  of  a  lost  art. 

"The  Highland  harp,  twin  sister  of  the  Irish,  receives,  of  course,  from  the 
Scotch  antiquary  full  and  sympathetic  treatment.  He  thinks  the  Scotch  'Queen 
Mary  '  harp  worthy  to  be  called  the  queen  of  the  tribe,  and  this  may  be  admitted 
as  far  as  the  condition  is  concerned.  But  surely  the  splendid  restoration  of  the 
FitzCxerald  harp  pictured  on  the  cover  of  this  stately  volume  far  excels  the  rest 
in  artistic  beauty,  not  only  of  form,  but  also  of  ornamentation. 

"The  decoration  of  these  instruments  is  indeed  a  curious  and  wide  subject  in 
itself,  and  Mr.  Armstrong  has  given  the  student  of  Celtic  ornament  ample  mate- 
rials for  studying  this  branch  of  it  in  the  many  exquisite  plates,  besides  scholarly 
drawings  which  make  this  volume  a  thing  of  beauty  as  well  as  a  mine  of  learning. 

"  We  can  hardly  imagine  that  this  extinct  instrument,  representing  an  ex- 
tinct art  (or  rather  virtuosity),  will  ever  again  receive  such  elaborate  handling. 
All  that  can  be  said  archajologically  has   been  said  by  Mr.  Armstrong,   and 


^3S-s 


whatever  can  be  added  musically  must  come  from  some  practical  harp-player  who 
is  able  to  make  a  comparative  study  of  the  early  stringed  instruments  of  cinlised 
races." 

SCOTSMAN,  16th  May  1904. 

"This  handsome  and  valuable  volume  has  already  been  full\  noticed  (Leading 
Article,  14th  May  1904).  It  is  right,  however,  to  call  attention  to  the  beauty 
and  interest  of  the  numerous  illustrations,  which  include  full-page  plates  figuring 
the  most  interesting  and  famous  specimens  of  the  Clarscha.  The  volume  is 
addressed  primarily  to  the  archwologist  rather  than  to  the  mere  musician,  but  at 
the  end  of  each  of  the  two  sections  into  which  it  is  divided  there  are  examples 
of  Irish  and  Highland  harp  music." 

GLASGOW  HERALD,  3rd  June  1904. 

"  Musical  antiquaries  interested  in  theso  particular  instruments  have  long 
waited  for  a  worthy  historian  of  the  Irish  and  the  Highland  harps.  They  have 
found  him  at  last  in  Mr.  Armstrong,  who  has  produced  not  only  an  admirable  his- 
torical treatise,  but  a  beautiful  work  of  art. 

"The  volume  is  one  that  the  musical  antiquary  can  hardly  help  losing  his 
heart  over.     To  him  it  must  be  the  poet's  'thing  of  joy,'  a  'beauty  for  ever.' 

"  Shows  a  vast  amount  of  original  research,  and  embodies  all  the  information 
'  on  the  books,'  as  the  lawyer's  phrase  is.  We  cannot  commend  this  book  too 
warmly  to  those  interested  in  the  subject.  Mr.  Armstrong  is  an  enthusiast,  and 
an  enthusiast  with  knowledge.  He  is  the  one  living  authority  on  the  Irish  and 
Highland  harps." 

THE  IRISH  TIMES,  17th  June  1904. 

"This  is  a  sumptuous  work,  about  which  it  is  very  hard  to  speak  without 
being  suspected  of  exaggeration.  To  musicians  and  antiquaries  it  will  especially 
appeal,  not  only  bj'  reason  of  the  immense  mass  of  knowledge  it  conveys,  the 
profound  research  of  which  it  gives  evidence,  and  the  admirable  lucidity  with 
which  it  is  written,  but  also  by  reason  of  the  splendid  series  of  illustrations 
which  illuminate  the  text.     It  is  produced,  as  we  have  said,  on  a  gorgeous  scale. 

"The  author  is  a  high  authority  on  the  subject. 

"  We  cannot  do  justice  to  the  value  of  this  fine  work  within  the  compass  of 
a  brief  review,  nor  indeed  do  we  think  that  the  parts  of  it  wc  would  select  would 
be  those  which  will  be  most  prized  by  students,  for,  though  it  has  great  historical 
interest,  its  real  worth  will  be  found  in  the  minute  technical  details,  which  are 
given  with  mast  remarkable  clearness  and  simplicity.  Th(3  illustrations  are 
exquisitely  done ;  indeed,  we  have  not  received  for  a  long  time  so  interesting 
a  volume,  so  well  written,  so  well  printed,  so  well  bound,  and  so  beautifully 
illustrated.     It  is  certainly  worthy  of  a  place  in  any  library." 


THE  NORTHERN  WHIG,  28th  May  1904. 

"  This  magnificent  and  monumental  volume  is  dedicated  '  To  the  memory  of 
the  patriotic  Irishmen  who  endeavoured  to  preserve  the  national  instrument  by 
establishing  and  supporting  two  Irish  Harp  societies  at  Belfast.' 

"  We  have  dealt  with  this  book  at  great  length,  but  not  unduly  in  view  of 
the  important  place  tlie  Irish  and  Scottish  troubadores  filled  in  the  social  life 
of  their  times,  and  the  beauty  and  wealth  of  the  poetry  which  has  been  dedicated 
to  their  memory  in  the  literature  of  both  countries." 

CORK  CONSTITUTION,  8th  June  1904. 

"  This  truly  magnificent  book  now  before  us  contains  as  a  first  part  the  history 
of,  and  a  general  dissertation  on,  the  Irish  and  Highland  Harps. 

"And  here  we  may  perhaps  appropriately  refer  to  the  illustrations  in  the 
book,  of  which  there  are  certainly  a  profusion  and  which  enormously  enhance  the 
value  of  the  letterpress,  as  well  as  place  before  the  reader  absolutely  correct 
representations  of  the  various  species  of  harp  referred  to  throughout  the  work. 
These  illustrations,  indeed,  call  for  more  than  a  mere  passing  glance,  and  we  do 
not  think  it  has  ever  been  our  lot  to,  so  to  speak,  feast  our  eyes  on  more  beautiful 
or  artistic  examples  of  the  handicraft  of  those  who  devote  themselves  to  this 
branch  of  book  producing.  The  most  noticeable  feature  is  the  exquisite  render- 
ing of  the  minutest  details  of  the  marvellous  carvings  and  ornamentation  with 
which  these  ancient  musical  instruments  are  so  profusely  decorated,  brought  out 
with  absolute  perfection  by  the  soft  brown  photographic  tone  of  colour  adopted 
in  their  production,  which  is  so  satisfying  to  the  eye  as  well  as  to  the  artistic 
instinct  of  the  reader. 

"  Approaching  the  work  itself,  we  may,  at  the  outset,  say  that  in  the  space 
available  for  a  review  of  this  kind,  it  would  not  be  within  the  bounds  of  possi- 
bility to  do  full  justice  to  the  learning  and  facile  power  of  description  which  the 
gifted  author  displays  throughout  every  page  of  his  book. 

"Coming  to  the  second  part,  we  find  an  elaborate  and  equally  interesting 
treatise  on  the  Highland  Harp,  illustrated  in  the  same  exquisite  manner  as  in  the 
case  of  the  Irish  instrument." 

KILKENNY  MODERATOR,  15th  June  1904. 

"  Patriots,  lovers  of  music,  and  bibliophiles  must  needs  unite  in  acknowledging 
a  debt  of  gratitude  to  Mr.  Robert  Bruce  Armstrong.  Patriots  are  indebted  to 
him  for  a  complete,  interesting,  and  admirably  written  history  of  the  national 
instrument ;  lovers  of  music,  for  a  treatise  on  an  instrument  which  has  been 
associated  from  the  earliest  times  with  the  art  of  melody  ;  the  admirers  of  hand- 
some books  will  be  delighted  with  a  volume,  which  is  a  rare  specimen  of  the 
skill  at  once  of  the  typographer,  the  illustrator,  and  the  binder." 


THE  CELTIC  EEVIEW.     Vol.  I.  No.  2. 

"  The  author  of  this  book  has  brought  together  so  mucli  information  on  the 
subject  of  harps,  Irish  and  Highlantl,  that  it  does  not  seem  possible  that  any- 
thing further  tan  be  written  about  them.  Surely  he  has  omitted  no  reference 
or  quotation,  nor  any  illustration,  whether  from  metal,  wood,  or  stone  which  may 
bear  upon  his  subject.  Mr.  Armstrong  writes  as  one  having  authority.  He 
makes  it  quite  apparent  that  he  writes  out  of  a  fullness  and  uiiiuiteness  of 
knowledge,  and  a  cultured  and  broad  interest  in  all  that  appertains  to  the  harp, 
its  construction  and  embellishment,  its  music,  its  performers,  and  its  recorders 
and  historians.  Every  source,  too,  is  laid  under  contribution,  and  as  a  result 
we  have  a  large  and  handsome  volume  which  is  in  no  hackneyed  sense  a  mine  of 
information,  and  which  will  be  a  living  pleasure  to  every  one  who  loves  the 
music  of  the  Gaelic  people. 

"There  are  many  illustrations  of  old  harps  still  in  existence  in  the  book,  as 
well  as  reproductions  of  old  illustrations  from  various  jjlaces.  These  are  very 
beautiful  in  tone  and  execution,  and  the  drawings  and  photographs  have  evidently 
been  prepared  with  the  greatest  care.  There  are  drawings  and  photographs  too 
of  details  of  ornamentation  of  harps,  which  give  us  some  idea  of  the  very  great 
labour  expended  on  beautifying  these  treasures,  for  they  were  indeed  treasures 
for  the  eye  as  well  as  the  ear.  And  besides  illustrating  them,  the  author  has 
described  the  various  instruments  in  great  detail,  their  measurements,  their 
histories,  and  the  famed  musicians  who  used  them.  Indeed,  not  the  least 
charming  feature  of  the  book  is  the  almost  personal  contact  into  which  we  are 
brought  with  the  makers  and  users  of  these  beautiful  old  harps.  A¥e  see  the 
men  who  make  the  harps  for  the  love  of  them,  choosing  with  thoughtful  care  the 
sallow  and  other  woods  which  would  give  the  sweetest  tone.  We  can  see  them, 
too,  weaving  graceful  and  intricate  interlacing,  and  burning  out  the  design  on  all 
available  parts  of  the  frame.  They  worked,  not  for  the  price  to  be  paid,  but 
because  they  loved  music  and  art,  and  theirs  has  lasted  as  work  done  in  such  a 
spirit  does  last.  No  higher  praise  can  be  given  to  Mr.  Armstrong's  own  work — 
this  big  book  on  the  Irish  and  Highland  Harp — than  to  say  that  it  too  is  done  in 
this  spirit  of  reverent  love,  and  therefore  it  is  of  the  best  and  will  remain  a 
treasure-house  of  information  for  many  generations  of  music-lovers." 

PROCEEDINGS  of  the  Society  of  Antiquaries  of  Scotland. 
Vol.  xxxix.  p.  9. 

"The  carving  (of  the  Queen  Mary  harp)  is  difficult  to  make  out  upon  the  harp 
itself;  but  a  Fellow  of  the  Society,  Mr.  Kobert  Bruce  Armslrong,  witii  singular 
skill  and  patience,  has  traced  the  design  with  a  needle-point  on  sheets  of  gelatine, 
and  has  produced  a  complete  illustration  of  the  harp  and  its  decoration  in  coloured 
plates  in  hie  recently  published  beautiful  volume." 


ENGLISH    AND 
IRISH    INSTRUMENTS 


^I^S  TM  UME 


^ 


!EMT   BMUCE  AMI 


AUTHOR  OF  THE    HISTORY   OF   LIDDESDALE    A.C, 


aej« 


^^ 


:.--^n^    J^^J  '^"7^^ 


MUSICAL 
INSTRUMENTS 


BY 


EOBEET   BRUCE  ARMSTRONG 

AUTHOR   OF    'THE   IRISH   AND   THE   HIGHLAND   HARPS,' 
'THE    HISTORY   OF   LIDDESDALE,"    ETC. 


ENGLISH   AND    IRISH 
INSTRUMENTS 


"  Music  !    oh,  how  faint,  how  weak, 
Language  fades  before  thy  spell ! 
Why  should  Feeling  ever  speak, 

When  thou  canst  breathe  her  soul  so  well  1  " 


EDINBURGH 

PRINTED  BY  T.  AND  A.  CONSTABLE 
1908 


IMPRESSION 

One  Jnmdred  and  eighiy  Copies 

?6. 


No. 


(P. 


Ajt^CJt^ 


Printed  liy  T.  and  A.  Constable,  Printers  to  His  Majesty 
at  tlie  Edinburgh  University  Press 


MUSICAL   INSTRUMENTS 


PART    II 


English  and  Irish  Instruments 

A  limited  number  of  copies  of  this  work  will  be 
forwarded,  carriage  free  in  the  United  Kingdom,  on 
receipt  of  £2  per  Vol.  net,  by 

ROBERT     B.     ARMSTRONG 
6    Randolph    Cliff 

EDINBURGH 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Introduction,       .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .1-3 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAR 

Description.  Popularity  of  the  instrument.  Gauge  of  strings.  Tutors.  The 
manner  of  holding  the  Guitar.  Of  the  right-hand  fingers.  Of  the  left- 
hand  fingers.  Method  of  fingering  the  open  notes.  Double,  triple,  and 
quadruple  notes.  A  shake.  A  beat.  A  slur.  Tuning  and  pitch. 
Tuning  in  the  key  of  G. 

Music 

Prelude  by  T.  Bolton,  E.  B.  A.  When  the  Eosy  Morn  Appearing — Serenade. 
A  favourite  song.  Ma  Ch're  Amie.  Prelude  by  T.  Bolton.  Highland 
Laddie,  with  variations.  Felton's  Gavot,  with  variations.  The  Eakes  of 
Mallow,  with  variations,     .......  5-24 


THE   HAEP-GUITAR 

Edward  Light's  first  instrument.  Descriiition.  Manner  of  holding.  Pitch. 
Tuning.  Gauge  of  Strings.  Scale  of  the  finger-board.  Levien's  improve- 
ment. F.  Chabran's  Tutor.  Scale  of  the  Lute.  The  Apollo  Lyre. 
Lyre  and  French  Lyre. 

Music 

Drink  to  me  only.  Julia  to  the  Wood  Eobin.  The  Duke  of  York's  March. 
The  Maid  of  Lodi.  Hope  told  a  flatt'ring  tale.  Copenhagen  Waltz. 
Caulder  Fair.     A  favourite  air,  with  variations,      ....        25-40 

THE    GUITAEE-HAEPE 

Scale.  Finger-board.  Method  of  tuning.  Transposition.  Eule  for  accom- 
paniment. 

Music 

Nel  cor  piii  iion  mi  sento,  with  variations.     Sonate.     Pastorale,  .  .  .        41-52 


iv  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


THE    HARP-LUTE-GUITAR 

PAGE 

Efhvanl  Light's  second  instrument.  Description.  His  tutor.  Scale.  Fingering. 
Tuning.     Pitch.     Gauge  of  strings. 

Music 
Five  preludes.     Lesson.     Duet.     Two  melodies,  .....        53-66 

THE    HARP-LUTE 

Edward  Light's  third  instrument.  Description.  Development.  John  Parry's 
Tutor.  Pitch.  Gauge  of  strings.  The  nut.  Scale  and  fingering. 
Finger-board.  Manner  of  playing.  Easy  preludes.  Mario  playing  the 
instrument.  Edward  Light's /owrfA  instrument.  The  Harp-Lyre,  almost 
the  same  as  his  H;irp-Lnte,  .  .  ...  .  .        67-80 

ADDENDA 

Edward  Light's  Tutor.     His  method  of  holding  the  instrument.     The  slur,  .  80«,  80i 

ERRATA 

Music 

My  Heart  and  Lute,  K.  B.  A.  Eleven  preludes  by  R.  L.  Downes.  Duet,  Mozart. 
Divertimento,  with  variations,  R.  B.  A.  Robin  Adair,  E.  B.  A.  Ah! 
vous  dirai-je,  Maman  1  with  variations.  Deserto  sulla  terra,  R.  B.  A. 
Ah  !  che  la  Morte  !  R.  B.  A.  Liebe  Augustine,  with  variations.  Diverti- 
mento, .........        81-96 

THE    BRITISH-LUTE-HARP 
Afterwards  known  as  the  Ditai^Harp 

The  ditierenco  between  this  instrument  and  the  Dital  Harp  explained.  Edward 
Light's  attempt  to  perfect  his  Harp-Lute.  His  specification.  He  obtains 
a  patent  for  the  mechanism.  He  finds  with  slight  alterations  the  instru- 
ment would  become  a  small  Harp.  This,  his  jifth  instrument,  he  named 
the  British-Lute-lIarp.     A  Directory  published. 


CONTENTS 


THE    DITAL-HARP 

PAGE 

Shortly  after — that  is,  within  a  year— Light  added  one  or  two  strings  to  his 
instrument,  attached  Dital  stops  to  the  three  bass  strings,  and  then 
named  the  instrument  the  Dital-Harp.  The  finger-board,  mechanism. 
Directions  to  correct  defects  in  nuts  or  frets.  Gauge  of  Strings.  Tuning. 
Scale.  Chromatic  Scale.  Manner  of  holding  and  playing.  Fourteen 
exercises.  The  Graces.  Change  into  seven  major  keys.  The  instrument 
as  represented  by  artists. 

Music 

Exercise  for  both  hands — A  Ground.  Capriccio,  0  dolce  Concento,  with  varia- 
tions. The  Cuckoo,  R.  B.  A.  Miss  Wade's  Minuet,  R.  B.  A.  Beautiful 
are  the  Fields,  R.  B.  A.     A  Favourite  Air,  ....      97-128 


THE   HARP-VENTURA 

Description — An  almost  perfect  instrument.     Specification.     Scale.     Chromatic 
Scale.     Change  of  Key. 

Music 
A  Venetian  Canzonetta.     Aurora  che  sorgerai.     Fille  so  mai  pretendi,    .  .    129-144 

EGAN'S   PORTABLE   HARP 
Description — Arrangement  of  Stops.     Gauge  of  Strings. 


Music 

The  Harp  that  once  through  Tara's  Hall.    The  Legacy.    Stanco  di  Pascalar,  with 

variations.     My  Lodging.     Ye  Banks  and  Braes,  .  .  .  .    145-1  GO 


ADDENDA 

The  Apollo  Lyre — Harp-Lute-Guitar — English  Lute — The  Harp-Ventura,           .  161 

Index,        ..........  163-167 

Errata,     ..........  168 


VI 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


ILLUSTRATIONS  (FULL-PAGE  PLATES) 


Title-page — Arranged  and  drawn  by  K.  B.  A. 

Sub-Title  arranged  and  partially  drawn  by  R.  B.  A.  (Photo-lithograph), 

Three  English  Guitars  (Photogravure),      .... 
Lady  Playing  the  English  Guitar  (Block  Illustration), 
Keyed  Guitars,  R.  B.  A.  (Collotype), 

Harp-Guitar  (Photogravure),  ..... 
Instrument — Edinbiugh  University,  K.  B.  A.  (Collotype), 
Apollo  Lyre  with  Additional  Strings,  R.  B.  A.  (Collotype), 

Harp-Lute-Guitar  (Photogravure),  .... 

Finger-board  (Block  Illustration),  . 

Harp-Lute  with  twelve  strings  (Photogravure),     . 
,,  with  fourteen  strings  (Photogravure), . 

,,  with  sixteen  strings  (Collotype), 

„  Mario  playing  the  instrument  (Photogravure), 

Harp-Lyre,  R.  B.  A.  (Collotype),  ..... 

British-Lute-Harp,   No.   84  (afterwards   known  as  the  Dital-Harp),   R.   B.  A, 
(Collotype),  ...... 

Specification  (Photo-lithograph), 
Lady  playing  the  Dital-Harp  (Collotype),    . 
Dital-Harp,  No.  IGO,  R.  B.  A.  (Collotype),  . 
Finger-board,  R.  B.  A.  (Block  Illustration), 
Dital-Harp,  No.  305,  R.  B.  A.  (Collotype), 

Harp- Ventura — Action  by  pressure  and  Lever  Action  (Photogravure), 
Specification  (Photo-lithograph),      ... 
Mechanism,  R.  B.  A.  (Photo-lithograph),    . 
Sub-title  to  Music  (Block  Illustration), 
Cupids  with  Wreaths,  etc.,  from  Architettura  by  Andrea  Palladio 
Venezea  (Block  Illustration),    . 

Egan's  Royal  Portable  Irish  Harp  (Photogravure), 


4 

7 

14 

24 
30 
32 

52 
57 

66 

68 
70 
76 

78 

96 
98 
100 
102 
103 
104 

128 
130 
132 
137 

144 

144 


CONTENTS 


BLOCK  ILLUSTEATIONS 

Cupid  playing  the  Lyre,    ..... 

The  English  Guitar— 

The  Finger-board,  .  .  .  .  • 

Examples  ii.,  iii.  and  IV.,    . 

Example  v.,  ....  . 

A  Shake.     A  Beat.     A  Slur,     Tuning, 

Pitch,  ...... 

Scale  of  the  Natural  and  Flat  Notes.      Scale  of  the  Natural  and  Sharp 

Notes, 
Scale  in  the  Key  of  G,        . 
Melody  in  the  Key  of  G,    . 

The  Harp-Guitar — 

Lady  Playing  the  Instrument, 

Finger-board  and  Chromatic  Scale, 

Scale  of  the  Natural  Notes.     Levien's  Improvement,  R.  B.  A., 

Scale  of  the  Lute,    . 

Harp-Guitar,  from  Bolton's  Tutor, 

Apollo  Lyre,  from  Bolton's  Tutor, 

The  Guitare-Harpe — 

Three  Examples,     . 

Scales  and  Finger-board, 

Scale  of  C  Major  and  two  Preludes, 

Harmonic  Scales  for  Accompaniments, 

Air,  with  various  Accompaniments, 

The  Harp-Lute-Guitar — 

Scale,  and  manner  of  practising  the  Scale, 
Method  of  Tuning, 

The  Harp-Lute — 

The  Nut,  R.  B.  A., 

Scale,  Stop,  and  Finger-board,  R.  B.  A., 

Cadences  in  eight  Keys, 

Chromatic  Scale, 

Double  Notes  and  Easy  Preludes,  . 

The  Dital-Harp— 

Notch,  Tooth,  and  Mechanism,  R.  B.  A., 
Spring,  R.  B.  A.,     . 


PAGE 

viii 

9 
10 
11 
12 
13 

14 
15 
16 

27 
28 
29 
30 
31 
32 

41 
42 
43 
45 
46 

54 
55 

72 
73 
74 
75 
76 

104 

105 


vni 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Nuts  and  Frets — five  Illustrations,  R.  B.  A., 

Tuning,  Cadence  or  Proof, . 

Scale  and  Chromatic  Scale, 

Fourteen  Exercises  for  right  and  left  hands, 

The  Turn,  Slur,  Shake  and  Beat,    . 

Cadences  of  proof  in  seven  Major  Keys,    . 

The  Harp- Ventura- 
Spring  of  Lever  Action  and  Scale  of  the  Instrument,  R.  B.  A., 
Chromatic  Scale  of  the  Bass  Strings,  R.  B.  A., 


PAGE 

106,  107,  108 

109 

109 

110,  111,  112 

.  112,  113 

.  113,  114 

mt,  R.  B.  A., 

133 

134 

INTRODUCTION 

Musical  Instruments,  which  are  now  obsolete  and  regarded  as  mere 
curiosities,  were  of  some  importance  in  their  day.  On  them  our  grand- 
mothers, great-grandmothers,  and  other  ancestresses  still  more  remote, 
played  the  simple  melodies  of  the  period  in  which  they  lived,  and  so 
rendered  their  lives  and  homes  more  cheerful. 

Many  years  ago  the  writer  heard  at  least  one  of  a  series  of  lectures 
upon  Old  Mvisic  and  Musical  Instruments  by  the  late  Sir  Robert  P. 
Stewart.^  There  were  then  persons  living  who  could  play  upon  most 
of  those  that  came  under  observation,  so,  from  the  wire-strung  Irish 
Harp  (a  reproduction  of  the  ancient  Harp  in  Trinity  College,  Dublin), 
down  to  the  instruments  in  use  at  the  commencement  of  the  nineteenth 
century,  almost  all  were  again  heard  in  public.  No  such  lectures  could 
now  be  given ;  even  the  wire-strung  Irish  Harp,  for  which  some  of  the 
most  enchanting  melodies  of  any  land  were  composed,  is  now  unheard. 
The  blind  harper,  the  lowly  representative  of  minstrels,  the  cherished 
guests  of  many  mansions,  has  passed  away,  and  there  is  now  not  a  single 
performer  to  be  found. 

The  revival  of  obsolete  instruments  may  not  be  required,  but  it  is 
certainly  desirable  that  clear,  distinct,  and  correct  information  regarding 
them  should  be  procurable. 

A  catalogue  in  which  may  be  found  incorrect  (perhaps  concocted) 
names  for  instruments,  concerning  which  the  author  could  have  had 
no  information ;  instruments  in  our  National  Museums  which  are  or 
were  incorrectly  labelled  ;  a  confused  statement  in  our  most  important 
Musical  Dictionary  ;  the  deplorable  mistakes  of  artists  who  have  intro- 
duced into  their  pictures  obsolete  instruments,  which  they  presumably 
intended  to  represent  as  being  played  upon," — such  are  tlie  conditions  that 

'  The  lectures  were  delivered  in  a  hall  in  Abbey       Vignoles's  Memoir. 
Street,  Dublin,  and  are  not  noticed  in  Mr.  O.  J.  -   See  jjp.  114-1 1."). 


2  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

have  induced  the  writer  to  prepare  the  following  notes  concerning  a  few 
stringed  instruments,  some  of  which  are  now  imperfectly  understood.  If 
others  who  have  paid  attention  to  instruments  of  a  different  class  can  be 
induced  to  give  the  information  they  possess  to  the  public,  interest 
may  be  aroused,  and  the  splendid  collection  in  the  Victoria  and  Albert 
Museum — the  property  of  the  nation — may  in  the  future  be  looked  upon 
as  something  more  than  a  mere  accumulation  of  decorative  objects. 

The  instruments  which  are  noticed  in  this  work  are  elegant  in 
form,  and  for  the  most  part  full  and  sweet  in  tone.  They  are, 
however,  by  no  means  perfect,  and  to  this  grave  defect  may  be  attri- 
buted the  fact  that  they  are  no  longer  heard,  while  the  Spanish 
Guitar,  a  more  perfect  instrument  of  inferior  tone  and  form,  is  still 
held  in  estimation. 

The  writer  does  not  suppose  that  the  following  notes  exhaust  the 
subject,  but  the  information  given  may  enable  the  reader  to  string, 
tune,  and  perhaps  play  upon  an  instrument  which  he  or  she  may  possess. 
They  may  also,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  prevent  the  instruments  noticed  from 
being  treated  by  artists  In  a  manner  otherwise  than  correct,  so  that 
in  this  age  of  cheap  reproduction  we  may  not  have  a  repetition  of  an 
artistic  absurdity  transmitted  to  posterity. 

It  is  impossible  to  give  an  exhaustive  list  of  music  arranged  or 
written  for  an  obsolete  instrument :  rare  as  some  of  the  instruments 
are,  the  music  is  rarer  still.  An  instrument  which  has  been  hidden 
away  in  the  lumber-room  of  the  house  in  which  it  was  once  used 
may  be  brought  to  light,  but  the  music  for  it  is  scarcely  likely  to  be 
preserved.  Occasionally  a  small  volume  is  to  be  met  with  amongst  a 
miscellaneous  lot,  but  now  that  the  old  establishment  in  St.  Martin's 
Lane,  London,  where  collectors  could  possibly  hear  of  what  interested 
them,  is  closed  for  ever,  the  difficulty  of  obtaining  tutors  and 
advanced  music  for  obsolete  instruments  has  increased, — increased  to 
such  an  extent,  that  the  preparation  of  such  a  work  as  this  is  now  one 
of  real  difficulty.  It  is  to  be  hoped  that  those  who  are  not  collectors 
of  instruments,  and  who  may  possess  tutors  or  music  for  obsolete 
instruments,  will  send  all  such  to  the  British  Museum,  of  which  institu- 
tion the  musical  library  is  in  some  branches  defective. 

If  there  are  inaccuracies  in  the  following  notes,  the  writer  will  feel 


INTEODUCTION  3 

obliged  to  those  who  may  point  them  out.  When  his  desire  is  to  be 
minutely  accurate,  he  has  no  scruple  in  referring  to  the  inaccuracies  of 
others.  It  is  unfortunate,  but  true,  that  incorrect  names,  representa- 
tions, or  statements,  when  they  occur  in  published  works,  are  sure  to 
be  repeated.  Labels  in  museums  can  be  replaced,  but  incorrect  state- 
ments or  pictorial  representations  live,  and  may  be  referred  to  hereafter 
as  proof  that  the  false  is  true.     Is  that  desirable  1 


or 

< 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAR' 

An  instrument  in  common  use  during  the  eighteenth  and  at  the  com- 
mencement of  the  nineteenth  century.  In  form  it  somewhat  resembles 
a  pear  or  heart.  The  head  at  the  end  of  the  neck  is  bent  backwards,  and 
the  strings,  of  which  there  are  twelve,  ten,  or  eight  (to  be  afterwards 
referred  to),  are  attached  to  small  ivory  knobs  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
body  and  stretched  over  a  bridge ;  the  iinger-board,  which  is  frequently 
covered  with  ivory,  being  furnished  with  brass  frets.  The  back  of  the 
instrument  is  very  slightly  curved,  and  the  neck  is  terminated  by  a 
machine  or  other  head,  with  twelve,  ten,  or  eight  keys  or  pegs.  The 
finger-board  is  pierced  with  as  many  as  seven  holes,  through  any  one  of 
which  a  metal  rod  with  screw  may  be  passed,  by  which  a  piece  of  ivory 
"capo-tasto"  is  drawn  tight  to  the  finger-board  and  fastened  in  front, 
the  fret  below  the  "  capo-tasto  "  taking  the  place  of  the  nut,  the  pitch 
being  thereby  raised  one  or  more  semitones. 

The  English  Guitar  was  frequently  in  favour,  and  about  1770  "its 
vogue  was  so  great  among  all  ranks  of  people  as  nearly  to  break 
all  the  Harpsichord  and  Spinet  makers.  The  ladies  disposed  of  their 
Harpsichords  at  auctions  for  one-third  of  their  price,  or  exchanged  them 
for  Guitars " ;  and  Kukman,  the  Harpsichord  maker,  almost  ruined 
himself  by  purchasing  his  own  instruments.  Kirkman  succeeded  in 
changing  the  fashion  by  purchasing  a  number  of  cheap  Guitars  and 
presenting  them  to  milliner  girls  and  street  ballad-singers.  These  he 
taught  to  play  a  few  choi'ds,  and  so  accompany  themselves.  The  ladies 
were  disgusted ;  the  rage  for  the  Guitar  passed,  and  the  Harpsichord 
was  again  heard.  While  the  Guitar  paroxysm  lasted,  scarcely  a  song  or 
baUad  was  printed  without  its  being  transposed  or  set  for  the  instrument," 

'  There  can   be  no  question   as  to  the  correct  Encyclopedia  Londineusis,  ami  by  Dr.  Busby  in 

name    of    this   inatrumeut.      It  is   mentioned   by  his  Concert  Koom  AnecJotes. 

E.  Light  in  his  Instruction   Book  to  his   Harp-  ^  G.  Jones's  article  MDSic,  in  the  Encyclopaedia 

Lute-Guitar,    by    G.    Jones    in    article    MUSIC,    in  Luudinenais. 


6  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

and   if  the   reader  examines  the   popular   ballads  of  the  close    of  the 
eighteenth  century,  many  instances  of  this  will  be  found.' 

Ladies  either  tuning  or  playing  upon  the  English  Guitar  were  subjects 
which  noted  artists  did  not  disdain  to  represent,  and  at  the  Guildhall 
Exhibition  in  1895  a  portrait  of  the  Hon.  Mrs.  Charles  Yorke  by  Sir  Joshua 
Reynolds,  No.  93,  was  exhibited.  The  lady  is  represented  in  the  act  of 
tuning  an  English  Guitar,  which  is  most  carefully  painted.  There  are 
sixteen  frets  and  seven  holes.  When  first  sketched  the  ivory  "  capo-tasto  " 
had  been  attached  above  the  fourth  fret,  but  this  was  afterwards  painted 
over.  In  the  National  Portrait  Gallery,  Dublin,  there  is  a  fine  engraving  of 
Miss  Harriet  Powell,  1769,  by  Richard  Houston,  after  C.  Reid,  in  which  the 
lady  is  represented  as  tuning  an  English  Guitar.  In  three  Instruction  Books 
that  the  writer  has  examined  there  are  engravings  in  which  performers 
are  represented  to  show  the  correct  manner  of  holding  the  instrument. 

The  English  Guitar  was  made  in  at  least  three  sizes.  On  the  finger- 
board of  the  two  larger  there  are  fifteen  or  sixteen  frets ;  on  that  of  the 
smallest  twelve  frets.  Those  of  the  largest  size  that  the  writer  has  seen 
were  made  in  Ireland.  One  of  these  illustrated — signed  W.  Gibson,"  Dubhn, 
1764 — measures  from  end  to  end  37  inches.  The  medium  size  illustrated 
— signed  Thomas  Perry,  Dublin' — measures  from  end  to  end  31|^  inches. 
The  smallest  illustrated — by  Preston  of  London — is  furnished  with  his 
tuner,''  by  which  the  strings  are  tightened  by  a  watch-key. 

A  small  instrument  of  the  eighteenth  century,  which  measures  from 
the  nut  to  the  lower  end  22^-  inches,  and  from  the  nut  to  the  bridge 
16^  inches,  has  the  following  strings  : — 

GAUGE   OF   CENTRE*  GAUGE   OF   OUTSIDE* 

1.  Steel  wire,         ......         j'^g  of  an  inch  above  1st  C. 

2.  Steel  wire,         ......        ^g  ,,  „ 

3.  Brass  wire,        ......         E,  2nd  Octave. 

4.  Steel  wire, ^-of  an  inch  above  IstC,    Copper  coil,  E,  2nd  Octave. 

5.  Steel  wire,  A,  1st  Octave,  .     Copper  cod,  D,  3rd  Octave. 

6.  Brass  ®  wire,  D,  2nd  Octave,       .     Copper  coil,  G,  3rd  Octave. 

'   Dibdin's  aongK,  3."i0  in  number,  as  published  •'  1776  to    18'J9,  James  Terry,  another  luaUiT, 

by    him    or    I'restiMi,    liad    many    of    them    extra  resided  in  Kilkenny, 

settings  for  the  Guitar.  ^  The  patent  is  not  recorded. 

'  The  writer  has  seen  "Gibson  anil  Wnnington  "  '■  Erard's  Gauge, 

on  a  <iiiilar  dateil  1770.  ^  The  eentrt'  of  this  string  is  usually  stet4  wire. 


THE   ENGLISH    GUITAR 


FROM  Preston's  EDixroN  of  bremner's  tutor 


8  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

An  Instruction  Book  for  the  English  Guitar  was  prepared  by  John 
Bremner,  a  native  of  Scotland,  who  moved  to  London  in  1762  and 
established  himself  in  the  Strand.  An  edition  of  his  Tutor,  with  sUght 
alterations,  was  published  by  J.  Longman  and  Co.^  about  1782,  and  another 
edition  was  pul)lished  by  J.  Preston.''  From  these  three  editions  of 
Bremner's  Tutor  the  following  has  been  extracted  :— 


THE    MANNER   OF   HOLDING   THE   GUITAR 

Place  it  across  the  body  with  the  neck  inclined  upwards  ;  then  apply 
your  right  hand  near  the  bridge,  so  that  your  first,  second,  and  third 
fingers  may  hang  over  the  third,  second,  and  first  strings,  holding  the 
neck  between  the  ball  of  the  thumb  and  root  of  the  forefinger,  inclining 
the  heel  of  your  hand  up  close  to  the  neck.  The  best  way  to  hold  it 
with  ease  in  this  position  is  to  sling  it  over  the  left  shoulder  with  a 
ribbon  fixed  to  both  ends  of  the  instrument,  so  that  the  hands  may  be 
free  to  move  up  and  down  without  interruption. 


OF   THE   BIGHT   HAND   FINGERS 

When  the  instrument  is  thus  placed,  hold  up  the  wrist,  so  as  it  may, 
together  with  the  fingers,  form  a  roundness ;  then  straight  the  fore- 
finger and  draw  it  across  all  the  strings,  beginning  at  the  smallest.  In 
like  manner  return  the  thumb  from  the  thickest,  by  whicli  the  position 
of  the  finfjers  will  be  discovered. 

The  true  "  fort "  of  the  instrument  is  best  produced  by  touching  the 
strings  between  the  sound-hole  and  the  bridge,  though  it  will  occasion  a 
pleasing  variety  to  play  sometimes  near  the  bridge,  and  afterwards  as 
far  up  as  the  little  finger  ^  will  allow  the  others  to  reach  ;  the  tone  of 
the  one  resembling  the  Lute,  and   the  other  the  Pipe  or  Organ.     The 

'  There  it  is  called  "Cuitar  (or  Citra)."    Another  Bremner's    'J'litor,   and    also    in   Light's,    may    be 

edition  was  published  by  Longman  and  Hroderip.  found  selections  of  music  suitable  for  beginners. 

2  Besides    Bremner's   Tutor,   Straube    )ire]iared  Thompson  and  Son  .ilso  puldished  aConijileto  Tutor 

an  Instruction  Book.      I'reston  publisheil  in  17S3  for  the  (iuittaritind  a  Complete  Tutor  by  J.  Oswald 

The  Art  of  Playing  the  fJuittar,  by  K<lw.ard  Light.  will  be  hereafter  referred  to. 

This  work,  which  is  quite  distinct  from  Bremner's,  •'   Krom    the    first   edition    we    learn    that   the 

is    of    little    conHeijucnce.       Of    Light    more   will  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  should  be  ajiplied 

be   beard   hereafter.       In  the   three   editions    of  to  the  end  of  the  bridge  next  the  smallest  string. 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAR  9 

running  of  the  thumb  and  forefinger  across  the  strings  as  before 
recommended  is  a  lesson  sufficient  for  the  first  day  :  only  the  thumb  to 
leave  one  string  for  the  forefinger  to  begin  with,  and  so  the  forefinger 
to  leave  one  string  for  the  thumb. 

OF   THE   LEFT   HAND    FINGERS 

Their  business  is  to  apply  the  strings  to  the  frets  (or  brass  bars  across 
the  finger-board)  so  as  to  produce  a  good  tone  ;  and  this  is  best  done  by 
pressing  the  finger  on  the  string  a  little  above  the  fret  from  which  the 
tone  is  received ;  each  of  these  frets  is,  in  reality,  a  bridge,  which,  if  the 
string  is  made  to  rest  firmly  upon,  must  undoubtedly  give  a  sound  little 
inferior  to  the  open  note. 

Before  the  Guitar  arrived  at  its  present  perfection,  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  were  recommended  for  use.  There  were  some  that  recom- 
mended only  these  two  for  all,  but  those  absurd  recommendations  are 
entirely  exploded  by  all  approved  masters,  for  common  reason  tells  us 
that  such  instructions  must  mar  the  performance  :  had  we  a  finger  for 
every  string  it  would  facilitate  the  execution ;  nor  is  there  any  reason 
why  a  finger  that  naturally  hangs  over  a  string  should  be  idle,  and 
another  come  from  a  distance  to  do  its  office ;  therefore  it  is  absolutely 
necessary  to  make  every  finger  alike  useful. 

Example  I.  shows  the  notes  representing  the  open  strings  and 
also  the  finger-board  of  the  Guitar  with  the  letters  marked.      The  x 


1st  string  • . . 
2nd  String      | 

- 

3rd  String        | 
4th  String    — 
5th  String 

6th  String 

indicates  the  position   of  the  finger  when  the  performer  is  tuning  the 
instrument. 


10 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


Example  II.  shows  a  different  method  of  fingering  the  open  notes 
from  that  formerly  given.     The  first  three  notes  are  jjLayed  by  the  thumb, 

which  must  not  be  Hfted 
at  each,  but  made  to  slide 

•       o         •^  2l         ll         1 

*       ■*  over  them.    The  next  three 

have  a  finger  to  each  ;  and 


Example  II. 


i^ 


^ 


as  their  strings  are  double,' 
care  must  be  taken  that  they  are  struck  so  as  to  make  them  vibrate 
equally ;  only  the  last  three  are  played  by  the  forefinger  instead  of  the 
thumb. 


X  means  the  thumb." 
1  means  the  forefinger. 


2  means  the  second  finger. 

3  means  the  third  finger. 


Example  III. 
1        a 


Another  lesson  on  the  open  strings. 


Example  IV.  is  designed  to  exercise  the  fingers  for  double,  triple, 
and  quadruple  notes.  In  playing  this  lesson,  the  fingers  must  be  pressed 
equally  on  the  strings,  and  then  drawn  in  towards  the  body,  the  thumb 

Example  IV. 


the  reverse,  at  the  same  time  viewing  the  strings  on  the  finger-board, 
to  discover  if  their  vibrations  are  equal,  which,  if  otherwise,  is  a  sign 
they  have  not  been  equally  pressed. 

Though  these  Examples  are  but  short,  yet  by  repeating  them  (which 
is  here  designed)  they  may  be  lengthened  at  pleasure,  taking  care  that 

'  Such  strings  as  arc  close  tn  pach   other  are  -  In  tlic  Instruction  Book  it  is  in  every  case 

unisons,  or  the  same  sound,  and  therefore  ion-  shown  as  o,  hut  as  this  sign  points  to  tlie  open 
sidered  as  one.  strings,  x  has  been  substituted. 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAR 


11 


no  more  time  be  lost  between  the  first  and  last  notes,  than  between 
any  two  lying  next  each  other.  Each  parcel  of  notes  between  the 
cross-bars  in  Example  IV.  may  be  considered  as  a  distinct  lesson  and 
repeated  as  above. 


Example  V. 

6th 

5th 

4th                3rd 

2nd 

String 

String 

String            String 

String 

* 


D 

-a- 


E 


1 


G 

o 


¥ 


M 


D 

9 


E 

o 


V 

1 


X      X 


i 


1st  String 
D    E   ?  t 


.1   .n 


:g=sSi 


Each  note  of  the  above  scale  has  the  proper  finger  of  the  left  hand 
marked  above  it  and  those  of  the  right  hand  below.  All  that  the  learner 
has  at  present  to  observe  is  to  [jlay  the  notes  as  directed  in  the  scale 
and  plan  of  the  finger-board,  Example  I.,  the  one  pointing  out  the 
proper  finger  and  the  other  showing  where  to  place  it. 

For  example.  The  first  note  C  is  the  sixth  string  open,  the 
second  being  D  is  the  second  finger  on  the  same  string,  placed  on  the 
instrument  as  represented  by  the  letter  D  in  the  plan,  and  so  of  all  the 
other  stopped  notes. 


OF   A   SHAKE 


This  seems  to  be  the  only  deficiency  of  the  instrument ;  for  in  every 
other  respect  it  doubtless  has  the  advantage  of  most  others  of  its 
compass,  as  it  is  capable  of  adding  the  full  harmony  to  any  note  the 
performer  chooses,  which,  together  with  its  melodiousness,  renders  it  a 
most  elegant  accompaniment  to  the  human  voice. 

One  method  of  a  shake  is  by  sounding  the  note  above,  and  then 
moving  the  finger  of  that  note  as  on  the  violin.  Another  method  is  by 
sliding  the  fingers  over  the  string,  beginning  with  the  first  finger  striking 
two  strings  togetlier ;  for  instance,  if  you  wanted  a  shake  on  D,  draw 
your  finger  over  the  open  notes  E  and  D  together,  which,  if  done,  will 
have  a  very  good  effect. 


12 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


The  next  is  the  same  with  the  former ;  only  with  this  difference, 

fj.  that   instead  of  moving    the    finger   up   and   down 

perpendicularly,  it  must,  in  falling  and  rising,  form 
an  oval   by  which   it  will  draw  the   string  a  little 
to  the  side,  so  as  to  renew  the  vibration.' 


i 


OF    A   BEAT 


f 


This  is  best  done  by  pressing  very  hard  on  the  string,  and  moving 
^  the  finger  that  stops  the  note,  which  when  done 

j^E^ — ff  must  be  kept  down  that  the   note  itself  may  be 


the  last  heard. 


OF    A    SLUR 


A  slur  on  this  instrument  signifies  no  more  than  to  point  out  such 

^        ^—  notes  as  are  played  by  drawing  the  same  finger 

t^Tj*  ?^^     ^  over  them,  except  in  the  songs,  where  they  like- 


wise show  such  notes  as  are  sung  to  one  syllable. 

The  left  hand  may  play  the  notes  in  such  music  as  descend,  which 

is  done   by  drawing  the  string   to  a  side,   in   raising  the   finger  from 

the  note  above.      When   such    notes   as   may    be    played 

in  this  manner  have  dots  above  them,  care  must  be  taken 

that  these  notes  thus  played  be  not  stronger  than  the 

others,  otherwise  they  will  have  a  bad  effect. 

OF   TUNING   THE   GUITAR 

Let  the  tliird  string  or  strings  be  tuned  the  same  sound  with  the 
third  finger  on  the  fourth  string  of  the  violin,  which  is  C.^  This  done, 
the  second  string  is  made  to  sound  the  same  with  .the 
first  finger  on  the  third  string  of  the  violin,  which  is  E — 
it  is  a  third  to  the  former.  Then  tune  the  first  string 
to  the  third  finger  on  the  same  violin  string,  being  G  ;  when  these  three 
are  tlnis  tuned  they  will  be  found  these  three  notes. 


i 


'  The  following  occurs  in  the  lirst  edition  : — 
The  last  is  that  used  by  the  harjier,  namely,  by 
the  tluimb  and  foretinger  on  two  diffeieut  strings. 
As,  for  instance,  8Ui)i)ose  a  sliake  is  wanted  on  D 
on  the  fourth  line,  then  it  is  performed  by  the 
thumb  and  foretinger  of  the  right  hand,  sounding 


the  note  alternately  with  the  open  string  above. 
If  this  nietliuil  is  once  acquired,  it  must  be  equal 
to  a  shake  on  any  instrument. 

-  It  will  be  best  to  slack  one  string  until  you 
get  the  other  to  the  proper  jiitch,  then  draw  up 
the  other  you  slackened  till  it  is  in  tune. 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAE  13 

As  a  proof  of  what  has  been  done,  compare  such  notes  as  are  crossed 
on  the  finger-board,  Example  I.,  with  the  open  strings  above,  and  if  they 
have  the  same  sound,  the  instrument  is  so  far  tuned.  As  for  instance, 
let  the  note  that  is  crossed  on  the  second  string  have  the  same  sound 
with  the  first  string  open,  and  so  the  third  and  second  string. 

The  other  three  strings  are  no  more  than  returns  to  the  same  sounds, 
they  being  eight  notes  lower  than  the  former,  viz.,  the  4th  is  tuned  an 
octave  to  the  1st,  the  5th  to  the  2nd,  and  the  6th  to  the  3rd. 


REMARKS   ON   THE   PITCH    OF   THE   GUITAR 

The  notes  appearing  so  high  makes  it  seem  impossible  for  the  human 
voice  to  accompany  this  instrument ;  but  when  it  is  considered  that  the 
music  is  set  an  octave  above  it  to  prevent  too  many  leger-lines  or 
vmaccustomed  clefs,  the  difficulty  wdl  be  removed.  The  true  state  of 
the  open  notes  is  this  : — 


The  notes  the  Guitar  2>lays.    14)         I         J         •       T 


The  notes  the  Voice  sings,      f  *        T 


J   r   r  r  f 


Those  Guitars  that  have  moving  bridges  on  the  neck  have  the 
advantage  of  the  others,  as  by  such  the  instrument  is  enabled  to  suit 
the  voice  with  any  pitch  of  song. 

Preston's  edition  of  Bremner's  Instruction  Book  concludes  with  the 
following : — 

"  For  the  encouragement  of  those  who  are  studiously  inclined  and 
who  wish  to  arrive  at  that  degree  of  perfection  which  is  only  to  be 
attained  by  a  series  of  unremitted  practices,  the  Editor  has  prefixed  at 
the  end  of  the  book  two  complete  scales  of  all  the  notes  that  may  be 
played  on  each  string,  whereby  such  a  thorough  knowledge  of  their 
different  situations  on  the  finger-board  may  be  gained  as  will  enable  the 
learner  to  perform  the  most  difficult  pieces  ever  published  for  this 
instrument  with  ease  and  facility." 


14 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Two  scales  of  the  natural,  flat,  and  sharp  notes  on  the  Guitar,  showing 
how  each  note  may  be  ])layed  on  three  ov  four  ditt'erent  strings  for  the 
better  convenience  of  executing  ditiicult  passages  and  double  stops,  and 
what  chord  is  produced  by  placing  the  finger  across  the  tinger-board  at 
any  of  the  frets  : — 

Scale  of  the   Natxrral, and  Flat  Notes  .  , 

^  4  ^  '^  ^  ^-^  ^  ^  4  »i  * 


jj  H   d   ^   4.^1    *   f  1    i    f   f 

:j'|  ^^  j   \f    f    f  \f    I  If  y   f  T    r 


Scale  of  tlie  Natural, and  Sliarp  Notes. 


i 


?f  .'f   '?   »p 


n  f  f  ^  "f  ^^ 


On  examining  the  above  scales,  a  professional  guitarist  stated  that  the 
English  Guitar  can  be  played  upon  in  all  keys,  but  in  many  of  them  with 


>- 

UJ 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAK 


15 


difficulty ;  further,  that  on  account  of  the  system  of  tuning,  the  instru- 
ment must  bt"  much  more  difficult  to  play  upon  than  the  Spanish  Guitar. 

English  Guitars  were  made  with  keys  which  when  pressed  struck  the 
strings.  These  finger-boards  were  occasionally  fixtures,  the  strings  being 
struck  from  beneath,  the  strikers  passing  through  apertures  in  the 
ornaments  which  cover  the  sound  holes.'  The  other  form  is  Smith's 
Patent  Box,''  which  was  attached  or  removed  from  the  lower  end  of  the 
instrument  at  pleasure.  If  a  key  was  pressed,  the  string  was  struck  from 
above.     Both  are  represented  in  the  Victoria  and  Albert  Museum. 

Before  concluding  this  notice,  it  is  necessary  to  refer  to  "  A  Compleat 
Tutor  for  the  Guittar  with  two  Scales  shewing  the  Method  of  Playmg  in 
the  Keys  of  C  and  G,"  by  J.  Oswald.  This  work,  which  was  probably 
published  between  1755  and  1760,  cannot  be  called  an  Instruction  Book. 
Plate  I.  has,  besides  the  usual  scale  of  the  instrument  in  C,  a  very 
unusual  scale   in   G,   the   Guitar    being  then  retuned  a    fourth   lower. 

1    ftring2*^flring3*^ftring  ^ftring6*\tri^g^ftring    fliiftjHand 


o    2 

•      I 
I      I 


i 


m 


m 


o     2    4* 


I      < 


I      1 


-* 


m 


p 


o  2  3  4 

.    •  •    ' 

.     I  '    > 

t     t  • 

Z 


I 


i 


12  3  4 


GA.BC     .DEF.GA     .EC     .DEFG.GABC. 

The  advantage  of  this  tuning  is  not  apparent,  for  amongst  the  sixteen 
pieces  of  music  in  G  which  appear  in  Book  I.,  three  descend  to  B,  and  only 
one,  which  is  reproduced  on  the  following  page,  descends  to  G.  In  the 
five  Books  which  follow,  there  are  thirty-four  pieces  in  G,  in  none  of 
which  do  the  notes  descend  below  D,  and  one,  so  far  from  descending  to 
the  low  G,  ranges  from  B  on  the  stave  to  E  in  Alt.  It  is  possible  that 
Oswald  found  his  scale  in  G  unsuitable,  and  abandoned  it  after  Part  I. 
was  issued. 

'  One  of  them  ia  the  Victoria  and  Albert  Museum      this  iu  vention  Christian  Claus  obtained  a  patent  on 
i3   stamped   "Patent   Instrument.      Claus  &  Co.,       2nd  October  1783. 
luTentor.     Londou,  No.   17  Garrard  Street."     For  -  The  patent  is  not  recorded. 


16 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Marella,  n  good  player  on  the  English  Guitar  and  not  a  bad 
com])o.ser,  timed  and  taught  the  instrument  in  the  key  of  A  Major,' 
but  this  was  an  exception.  The  instrument  as  a  rule  was  tuned  to  the 
key  of  C. 

MUSIC 

The  following  is  some  of  the  Music  advertised  : — 

A  New  Collection  of  Scots  and  English  Tunes  adapted  for  the  Guittar. 
Printed  and  Sold  by  Neil  Steuart  at  his  Music  Shop  ojjposite  the  head  of 
Black  fryers  Wynd,  Edinburgh.  In  this  work,  published  between  1761 
and  1765,  there  are  49  tunes. 

Bremner  advertises  Merchis'  Lessons  and  Duets,  Divertimentos,  Songs 
Book  1st,  Songs  Book  2nd ;  Straube's  Instructions ;  Maid  of  the  Mill ; 
Beggar's  Opera ;  Daphne  and  Amintor ;  Gentle  Shepherd  ;  Scots  Songs 
with  a  thorough  bass. 

J.  Walsh  published  Thomas  and  Sally  ;  Midas  ;  and  The  Jovial  Crew. 

David  Rutherford  published  "  A  Curious  Collection  of  the  most 
celebrated  Country  Dances,  Airs,  etc.,  which  are  now  in  vogue,"  etc. 

J.  Oswald,  besides  A  Compleat  Tutor,  Book  I.,  published  The  Pocket 
(!onij)anion,  Books  II.,  III.,  IV.,  V.,  and  VI.  ;  also  two  Books  of  Diverti- 
mentos and  ten  Songs;  12  Serenatas  by  Pereyra  Da  Costa  ;  12  Lessons 
by  Mr.  Bush  ;  Oswald's  Airs  of  the  Seasons  ;  Queen  Mab  ;  Fortunatus ; 
Harlequin  Ranger  and  the  Genii ;  and  The  Caledonian  Pocket  Com- 
panion, 8  vols. 

'   .\rticle  MUSIC  in  Encyclopsedia  Londinensis. 


THE    ENGLISH    GUITAK  17 

J.  Bland  published  The  Poor  Soldier  ;  Robin  Hood ;  Castle  of  Anda- 
lusia ;  Beggar's  Opera  ;  besides  a  Collection  of  Airs,  etc. 

Longman,  Lukey  and  Co.  and  J.  Johnston  published  The  Padlock  ; 
Cymon  ;  Jubilee ;  The  Golden  Pippin  ;  also  Thackray's  1st  and  2nd  set 
of  Lessons,  and  Thackray's  44  Airs. 

J.  Longman  and  Co.  published  12  Songs  for  the  Guitar,  with  a  Com- 
plete Scale;  24  Easy  Airs,  by  R.  Haxby  ;  18  Duettinos  for  2  Guitars, 
by  Wm.  Bates. 

Longman  and  Broderip  published  Inkle  and  Yarico. 

Edward  Light  published  The  Ladies'  Amusement.  It  is  also  stated 
that  he  published  monthly  a  collection  of  lessons  and  songs  called  The 
Musette. 

C.  and  S.  Thompson  published  The  Duenna. 

Preston  published  Richard  Coeur  de  Lion. 

Wilham  Wilson  of  Aberdeen  published  26  Songs,  most  of  them  with 
excellent  accompaniments. 

Thomas  Bolton'  composed  six  Bondeaus,  three  Songs,  and  three 
Preludes,  and  selected  and  adapted  other  three  songs  with  accompani- 
ments for  the  Guitar  or  Pianoforte-Guitar  (probably  the  keyed  instru- 
ment already  noticed).  This  work  was  printed  by  Longman  and  Broderip. 
In  the  preface,  Bolton  states  it  as  his  intention  to  publish  a  complete 
book  of  instruction,  with  plans  of  finger-board,  showing  the  different 
methods  of  taking  passages,  the  proper  rules  for  shifting  the  hand,  and 
the  art  of  playing  in  different  keys. 

As  already  stated,  the  popular  songs  of  the  latter  end  of  the  last 
century,  in  addition  to  the  regular  setting,  had  frequently  special 
arrangements  for  the  Guitar. 

Considering  the  popularity  of  this  instrument,  it  is  natural  to  suppose 
there  were  many  able  performers,  both  professional  and  amateur,  and  that 
advanced  pieces  for  the  more  accomplished  guitarists  were  written,  but 
no  really  fine  advanced  pieces  have  been  met  with  by  the  writer. 

•  Circa  1760-1820.     He    resided  at   10  Doiset  Spanish  Guitar,  Pianoforte,  Harp,  Harp-Lute,  aud 

Street,  Manchester  Square,  afterwards  at  26  Buck-  Lyre.       He   was   by  no    means   wanting   in    self- 

ingham  Place,  Fitzroy  Square.     Besides  being  the  esteem,  one  of  his  publications  being  respectfully 

author  of  a  treatise  on  Singing,  Bolton  wrote  and  dedicated  to  his  admirers  ! 
composed  "The  Village  Fete."     He  wrote  for  the 


18 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


When   the  rolV  morn   Appearing. 


n 


^^Modcr^ito 


:he     ro  -  fy      mom     Ap  _  pearifip     Paints    with     £old     the     Ve 


^ 


^ 


J t         1      .'_ 


-"  *■  wiT 


i 


en     the     fO-Cy       morn      Ap  _  peariVig     Paints     with     gold      the      Ver.dand     lawn 


'its      on      b.icks      of      thyme      dif  _  porting      Sip      the      fweets      and  hail      the      daw 


firbliop    birds     tJie       day     proclaimidv  Ca  _  rol         fwcet  the  live  -     Iv  Strain 


Wirbliog    birds     tJie       day     proclaimidg  Ca  _  rol         fwcet  the  live  -     W         Strain 


Tbe^       forfake    tieir     leafj      dwel  _  ling       To       fccnre 


tent,     the        hum  .  ble       pleanrr,       take     the     Scatter'd       ears      that       (all.    Nature       all         ^ 


Chililren       Viewinp      Kind  _    Iv      boiiiileoiis       cares       for     ali 


THE   ENGLISH    GUITAK 


19 


Serenade 


Voir 


Gnittar 


fal    _      _     S^°^  break  and  odoara       breatJbe 


in  ev  ^     _     ry 


^'^ly^a^l^rT°Pl^^j^ 


0) 

Arife,  and  Aid  the  dawn,  mj  fair, 
Difpute  the  blalh  with  yonder  Eaft; 
Thy  breath  fhall  inock  the  fragrant  air; 
The  light  thj  radient  eyes    increafe. 


20 


MUSICAL    IKSTEUMENTS 


A   Favonrite  Song  from  the  Coniedj'  of  the   Heirefs.' 


"-.  -tj^^^  I J  i' .  i_^  r^  I  r^  rff^^^ 


.    For   ttMidrrnffM  Ictrnid        m    Ijfe's     early     D:iv,        A  Pprents   /oft  forrows      to  mine    lerl    ibt- 


n^i^lPjTgiFW^^IJtf^'l^^l^^l^^-E 


The  Nightingale  plimriertl  the  mate  wiHow'd  Dove 
The  warbler]  Complaint  of  the  Suffering  Grove 
To  vouth  a.s  It   t  ipenW  gave   fenttrnrnl   New 
The  Object  ftill  changing  the  fympathy  true. 


Srjft  embers  of  pafsion  yet  reft  in  their  Glow. 
A  wnrmtb  of  more  Pain  may  thi.t  breaft  never  know 
Oi    if  too  indulgent  the  blefsing  I  claim 
Let  the  Spark  firop  from  reafon  thst  waken.s  the 

(flame 


>  The  melody  is  by  Paesiello,  the  introduction  and  aymphony  by  Linley, 
anil  the  8oug  and  necompaniment  from  a  volume  published  by  William  Wilson,  Aberdeen 


THE   ENGLISH    GUITAR 


21 


Ma  Chere  Amie. 


Voi, 


Guiltar 


r^  n 


C2) 

Under  fweet  friendfliip's  Sacred  name 
Mv  bofoin  caught  the   tender  flame 
May  Friendfhip  in  thy  bofom  be. 
Converted  into  love  for  me. 
Ma  Chere  £Cc. 


(3) 

Together  rear'd  together  grown, 

0  let  as   now  anite  in  one» 
Let  pity  foftcn  thy  decree, 

1  droop  dear  raaid  I  die  for  thee. 

Ma  Chere  8Cc. 


MUSICAL    I N  S  T  E  U  M  E  N  T  S 


PRELUDE  BY  T.BOLTON. 


Highland  Laddie -with  Variations 


^^J 


fi^^^^&^^^ppl^ 


THE   ENGLISH    GUITAR 


23 


Rltons  Gavot  with   tlie Variations 


24  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


The  Rakes  of  Mallow  with  the  Varitions 


g^ijrcrjrirrrrirrrnjrjri 


^rrrnrr/rcri'ij-ll 


rtt^'irfli^rrr 


Vaif»J» 


irrnn^urn  1,^71^^ 


^^^^^^^ 


igaE 


i 


'      var.if.  -i^^ 


/J:jid:j:fLt:rit;f''^ffs 


HARP-GUITAR 


THE    HARP-GUITAR 

This  instrument  was,  according  to  Dr.  Thomas  Busby,  invented  by- 
Edward  Light'  about  1798.'  Light  has  ah-eady  been  referred  to  as  the 
author  of  an  Listruction  Book  for  the  English  Guitar  and  an  arranger  of 
music  for  that  instrument.  Whether  his  capabilities  as  a  musician  were 
or  were  not  of  a  high  order,  Edward  Light  ^  deserves  to  be  remembered 
as  the  inventor  of  four  or  five  instruments,  which,  although  imperfect,  are 
most  artistic  in  form  and  generally  charmingly  decorated.  The  specimen 
illustrated,  one  of  the  earliest,  has  "Barry  Maker"  painted  upon  it, 
"  Barry "  *  undoubtedly  being  placed  over  some  earlier  name,  which 
name  is  certainly  not  Light. 

The  name  Harp-Guitar^  was  probably  given  to  the  instrument  on 
account  of  the  sounding-board  and  rounded  back  resembling  in  miniature 
those  portions  of  the  Pedal  Harp,  while  the  neck  with  frets  and  head 
somewhat  resembles  the  Guitar. 

Light's  instrument,  which  has  eight  strings,  was  made  in  at  least  two 
sizes.     One  with  machine  head  (perhaps  an  addition)  in  the  Victoria 

1  There   can  be   no  doubt  that   Edward  Light  Dital-Harp.       His   works    are    now    rare.     There 

was   the    inventor.       One    of   these    instruments  were  others  of  the  same  name  who  worked  with 

in  the  possession  of  the  writer  has  eight  strings,  him.     T.  Light  composed  a  Kondo,  ,ind  arranged 

and   is    signed    "Light    luven' ;    Barry    Maker."  it  as  a  Duet  for  the  Harp-Lute  and  Piano  or  Harp. 

This   instrument   is    not    an    early  one,   and  has  Richard   Light   wrote   and   composed   words   and 

but   ten    frets.       As    Edward    Light    will   be   so  music  with   accompaniments  for  the  Dital-Harp, 

frequently  referred  to,  the  following  brief  notice  also  Preludes  and  Cadences  for  the  same  instru- 

may  be  of  interest.      He  is  believed  to  have  been  ment,  and  Duets  for  it  and  the  Pianoforte.     He 

born    in    1747,   was   Organist   of  Trinity   Chapel,  also  wrote  for  the  Pianoforte. 

St.   George's,    Hanover    Square,   and   taught   the  -  Concert  Room  Anecdotes,  vol.  ii.  p.  275. 

Pianoforte,  Singing,  and  presumably  the  English  ^    A  full  and  interesting  account  of  Light  will 

Guitar  and  all  the  instruments  he  invented.     He  be  found  in  the  Dictionary  of  Natioual  Biography, 

was  Lyrist  to  H.R.H.  the  Princess  of  Wales,  and  '  A.  Barry  of   IS   Frith   Street,  Soho,  London, 

resided  at  16   Harley  Street;  at  34  Queen  Anne  was  a  maker  of  small  instruments  well  into  the 

Street,  Portland  Chapel ;  8  Foley  Place,  Cavendish  nineteenth  century,  and  was  certainly  employed 

Square,  and  later  on  at  38  Berners  Street,  Oxford  by  Light. 

Street,  and  is  believed  to  have  died  in  1832.     He  ^  There    can    be    no    doubt   as    to    the    name, 

published    for    the    English    Guitar,   the    English  I 'pon  the  title-pages  of  the  Tutors  by  F.  Ch.abran 

Lute,  the   Harp-Lute-Guitar,  the  Harp-Lute  and  and  T.   Bolton  there  are  representations  of   the 

Apollo    Lyre,    the    British     Lute-Harp,    and    the  instrument. 


26  MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 

and  Albert  Museum  measures  30|^  inches  from  nut  to  end,  25  inches 
from  nut  to  bridge,  and  has  seventeen  frets,  the  lowest  being  9^  inches 
from  the  bridge.  The  smaller  size,  represented  by  the  plate,  measures 
2i^  inches  from  nut  to  end,  ISf  inches  from  nvit  to  bridge,  twelve  frets, 
the  lowest  being  9f  inches  from  the  bridge,  the  greatest  width  of  the 
sounding-board  11|-  inches.  As  before  stated,  another  specimen  has  but 
ten  frets. 

The  writer  cannot  state  that  Light  prepared  a  Tutor  or  arranged 
music  for  this  instrument,  but  he  is  almost  certain  to  have  done  so. 
Dr.  Busby,  who  published  in  1825,  when  Light  was  still  alive,  writes 
as  follows  :  "  The  strings  of  the  instrument  are  seven  in  number ; 
the  highest  six  are  catgut,  and  the  other  consists  of  silk  covered  with 
silver  wire.  The  scale  and  tuning  are  those  of  the  common  English 
Guitar  with  the  addition  of  the  Fiddle  G  ;  but  its  tone  is  very  superior 
to  that  instrument  both  in  power  and  sweetness,  and  more  than  vies 
with  the  mellifluence  of  the  Pedal  Harp."  ^  On  October  G,  1825,  the 
year  Busby  published,  Mordaunt  Levien  of  London,  a  Professor  of 
Music,  took  out  in  France  a  patent  for  the  importation  and  improve- 
ment of  this  instrument,  the  number  of  strings  being  seven,  and  the 
fingering  similar  to  that  of  the  common  Guitar.^  This  perhaps  explains 
Busby's  inaccuracy. 

According  to  Busby,  Light's  instrument,  unlike  the  English  Guitar 
— which,  as  already  stated,  is  tuned  an  octave  lower  than  the  written 
notes — is  tuned  a  major  sixth  lower  than  the  written  notes. 

As  the  strings  found  upon  the  instrument  illustrated  are  evidently 
those  which  were  upon  it  when  in  use,  the  unstretched  portions  have  been 
gauged  in  case  they  may  be  of  some  use  to  those  wishing  to  string  and 
play  upon  one  of  these  Harp-Guitars. 

SPECIMEN    ILLUSTRATED 

1st.     Missing.  2nd.  Missing.  3rd.    Gut,  Gauge  D,  2nd  Oct. 

4th.   Gut,  Gauge  D,  3rd  Oct.  5th.   Gut,  Gauge  D,  4th  Oct. 

6th.    Silver,  Gauge  G,  3rd  Oct.  7th.   Silver,  Gauge  A,  4th  Oct. 

8  th.   Missing. 

'  Concert  Room  Anecdotes,  vol.  ii.  p.  275.  ^  Professor  Niecks,  from  Chouqiict's  Catalogue 

of  the  Paris  Collection. 


THE   HAEP-GUITAR 


27 


Early  in  the  nineteenth  century  F.  Chabran  prepared  Instructions  for 
playing  upon  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Lute.  Upon  the  title-page  of  this 
work  there  is  a  ^iretty  illustration,  apparently  by  R.  Williamson,  in 
which  a  lady  is  represented  as  playing  upon  a  Harp-Guitar.  This  was 
intended  by  Chabran  to  show  the  manner  in  which  the  instrument 
should  be  held  when  in  use. 


"'tlicr  Si-iip. 


In  the  preface  to  his  Tutor  Chabran  states  that  "the  Harp-Guitar  in 
point  of  power  and  brilliancy  of  tone  is  little  inferior  to  the  Pedal  Harp, 
and  as  an  accompaniment  to  the  voice  most  undoubtedly  surpasses  all 
instruments  of  a  similar  kind."  Chabran's  instructions  are  of  the 
briefest.  He  gives  directions  for  tuning  the  3rd,  2nd,  and  1st  strings 
to  the  following  notes   ^r^f  f  f  .  and  the  bass  strings  in  octaves  down- 


wards "  except  the  last  string,  which  may  be  tuned  either  in  unison  to 
the  F  on  the  first  space  or  an  octave  below."  He  certainly  did  not 
follow  Light,  who  tuned  the  instrument  one-sixth  lower  than  the  written 


28 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


notes ;  so  presumably  he  tuned  it,  like  the  English  Guitar,  an  octave 
lower;  but  he  exjslains  that  by  inserting  the  stop  "capo-tasto"  into  the 
upper  hole  upon  the  finger-board  the  tone  is  raised  one  note,  and  the 
instrument  instead  of  being  in  C  is  then  in  D  major.  When  changed 
to  the  second  hole  the  instrument  is  in  E  flat,  and  when  the  third  hole 
is  used  the  instrument  is  in  E  natural.  Although  Chabran  gives  little 
information  and  does  not  notice  the  gauge  of  the  strings,  his  Tutor  is  of 
the  first  importance,  as  from  it  we  learn  that  the  eighth  string  is  tuned 
toF. 


The  folloTtring;  Scale  oftheFiwotR-BoARD  shews  how  to  stop  every  Note  on  the  Instrument 
The  Finger- Board  of  the   Harp-Guitar 


^ 


Harp  Guitar  Tutor 


8'^  String 


7*?*  String 


Chromatic  Scale. 

6*  String 


S*.*"  String 


4■*^  String 


## 


I        2       3      4 


1     a    y 


-i — e — 3- 


O        1        2        3         0        i        2~^      5~ 
NB.  A  Sharp  or  B  Flat;  C  Sharp  or  D  Flat;  D  Sharp  or  E  Flat  &c  are  the  same  Note. 


THE    HAEP-GUITAR 


29 


Eighth  ^ 

String.         7. 


m 


oth 


Scale  of  all  die  Xatoral  Notes. 


G  AJBI    f 


5* 
D  I    E 


.th 


nm 


F     G   A 


M4 


D      E     F 


GAB 


C    D    E    F. 


m 


-* = — ,*r— 


d    I  * 


5=fc 


4   '   * 

2         0 


2         O       I        O     2      * 


1         0     2    4 


Z    2    4 


The  eighth  string,  which  was  afterwards  abandoned,  was  certainly 
in  use  about  1818,  as  we  know  that  on  or  before  that  year  Mr.  Levien 
of  Pentonville,^  probably  the  person  already  referred  to,  produced 
an  improved  Harp-Guitar.  This  instrument  has  a  head  somewhat 
resembling  the  upper  portion  of  a  Pedal  Harp.  The  first  six  strings 
pass  through  metal  loops,  which 
are  screwed  to  that  portion  of 
the  sounding-board  whei'e  the  first 
fret  is  usually  placed.  Any  of 
these  loops  can  be  turned  by  the 
tuning-key,  which  has  a  slit  across 
the  handle  for  that  purpose.  A 
string  so  acted  upon  being  thus 
raised  or  lowered  a  semitone,  by  this 
means  necessary  flats  or  sharps 
were  to  be  produced,  and  the  per- 
former enabled  to  play  much  music 
without  the  necessity  of  transposing 
it  into  the  keys  of  C,  G,  or  F,  as 
was  usual,  or  resort  to  cross-finger- 
ing, the  method  previously  in  use 
for  the  production  of  certain  notes.  The  improved  instrument,  for 
which  Levien  received  a  reward  of  ten  guineas  from  the  Society  of 
Arts,  has  eight  strings ;  but  unfortunately  Mr.  G.  Jones,  by  whom  it  is 
described,  has  neglected  to  state  the  notes  to  which  they  should  be  tuned. 
The  writer  has  not  met  with  one  of  these  instruments,  but  the  drawings 
which  illustrate  Mr.  Jones's  notice  are  reproduced  in  outline  (see  above). 
Fig.  1,  the  head  of  the  improved  Guitar,  and  part  of  the  finger-board  ; 

1  From  theTrie.inial   Directory,   1S171819,  it       56  Marchmont  Street,  Russell  Square.      He  corn- 
appears  that  Mordaunt  Levien  was  then  living  at       posed  for  the  Guitar. 


30 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


a.  a.  the  nut,  and  h.  h.  the  metal  loops  ai-ranged  across,  or  in  place  of 
the  first  fret.  Fig.  2,  a  side  vievf  of  these  parts.  Fig.  3,  an  enlarged 
view  of  that  part  of  the  finger-board,  containing  the  first  fret,  with  the 
loops  screwed  into  it.  One  of  the  loops,  a.  a.  is  here  represented  as 
being  turned.  Fig.  4,  one  of  the  loops  with  the  screw-stem.  Fig.  5, 
section  of  the  hole,  the  opposite  sides  of  which  are  rounded  off  so  as  not 
to  injure  the  string.^  This  improved  Harp-Guitar  cannot  have  been  con- 
sidered altogether  satisfactory,  for  Levien  shortly  after  abandoned  the  loop- 
stops  and  produced  another  instrument,  which  will  be  hereafter  described. 
As  before  mentioned,  F.  Chabran  prepared  Instructions  for  playing 
upon  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Lute.  This  Tutor  was  printed  by  Clements, 
Banger,  Hyde,  Collard  and  Davis,  26  Cheapside.  A  Tutor  by  the  same 
person  for  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Lute  was  also  published  by  Clements 
and  Collard,  Cheapside.  A  copy  of  the  latter  formed  part  of  the  musical 
library  of  Mr.  J.  G.  Morley,  but  is  missing  and  cannot  be  traced.  One 
of  the  former  is  before  the  writer.  In  it  there  is  no  illustration  of  the 
"  Lute,"  but  Chabran  gives  the  scale  which  is  here  reproduced. 


Scale  of  the  Late. 


Tenth 
String 


It  may  be  noticed  that  this  is  not  the  scale  of  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar 
or  of  the  Harp-Lute,  but  is  the  scale  of  the  English  Guitar  with  the 
addition  of  four  bass  strings.  There  is  a  large  English  instrument 
which  the  writer  cannot  name.  The  body,  unlike  the  real  "  Lute,"  has 
a  flat  back,  and  in  form  resembles  that  of  an  English  Guitar.  The  head 
is  like  that  of  the  Theorbo,  or  double-headed  Lute.  One  of  these,  by 
Barry,  may  be  seen  amongst  the  collection  belonging  to  the  Edinburgh 
University.  This  specimen  has  seven  strings  upon  the  finger-board  and 
three  double  strings  in  the  bass  off  the  finger-board.  It  cannot  be 
stated  that  this  instrument  is  the  "  Lute  "  referred  to  by  Chabran,  but  it 
certainly  could  be  tuned  to  the  "  scale  of  the  Lute"  as  published  by  him. 


'  History  of  the  Rise  and  Progress  of  Music. 
By  G.  Jones.  Extracted  from  the  Encyclopaedia 
Londinensia.       London,    1818.       For   the   use    of 


this  rare  work  the  writer  is  indebted  to 
Mr.  H.  Journet,  43  Tottenham  Court  Road, 
London. 


UNIVERSITY      EDINBURGH 


THE   HARP-GUITAE 


31 


C  Wheatstone  published  Instructions  for  his  Improved  Harp-Lute 
by  John  Parry.  On  the  title-page  of  an  early  edition,  probably  the 
second,  the  following  appears :  "  Also  for  the  Lyre  or  Harp-Guitar." 
Whatever  there  may  have  been  in  an  earlier  edition,  there  is  nothing 
in  the  one  in  question  relating  to  the  Harp-Guitar,  and  the  statement 
does  not  occur  on  the  title  to  a  later  edition  of  the  work. 

Instructions  for  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Apollo  Lyre  were  prepared  by 
T.  Bolton,^  before  referred  to,  and  published  by  Wheatstone  and  Co. 
As  not  only  the  name  but  the  representation  of  the  instrument  appears 
upon  the  title-page  of  this  Tutor,  the  engraving  has  been  reproduced. 

Bolton  states  that  the  celebrity  of  the  instruments  may  be  attributed 
principally  to  their  resembling,  in  point  of  tone,  the  real  Harp.  He  also 
tells  us  that  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Lyre,  though  different  in  form,  are 
played  and  fingered  in  precisely  the  same  manner, — the  scale  being  that 
of  the  English  Guitar,"  with  the  addition  sometimes  of  a  seventh  bass 
string,  G.  Bolton,  as  appears  from  the  representation  of  the  finger-board, 
intended  the  performer  to  produce  G|±  AiJ  Ajj:  (or  B^)  and 
BB  from  the  G  string,  which  string  he  states  is  most 
effective,  particularly  in  accompaniments,  without  which 
the  notes  referred  to  could  not  be  produced.  He  appar- 
ently tuned  the  instrument  like  the  English  Guitar,  an 
octave  lower  than  the  written  notes  ;  and  although  he 
appears  to  disregard  Light's  system  of  tuning,  he  remarks 
that  the  instrument  when  played  alone  may  be  tuned 
somewhat  higher,  the  C  being  then  tuned  to  D  or  El?. 
He  notices  the  "  capo-tasto,"  which,  although  very 
useful,  was,  he  says,  seldom  applied. 

He  further  states  that  the  1st,  2nd,  and  3rd  strings 
are  the  same  gauge  as  the  1st,  2nd,  and  3rd  strings  on  the  violin,  and 
the  remaining  strings,  silver  spun  on  silk,  are  to  be  of  proportionate  sizes. 

Bolton's  instructions  as  to  fingering,  etc.,  are  very  similar  to  those 
abeady  given  for  the  English  Guitar  ;  but  when  chords  are  to  be  played, 
the  performer  is  directed  to  commence  with  the  lowest  note,  and  pass 


1  This  Tutor  was  most  obligingly  brought  to  the 
notice  of  the  writer  when  this  chapter  was  in 
type,  and  Levien's  instructions  had  been  fully 
noticed,  consequently  only  such  additional  infor- 


mation   as    may    interest    the    reader    has    been 
printed. 

=  C  E  G  C  E  G.      Bolton  states   that  small 
Spanish  Guitars  can  be  tuned  in  a  similar  manner. 


32 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


swiftly    to    the   highest,    in    a    manner    similar    to    that    practised    on 
the  Harp.' 

There  are  a  considerable  number  of  elementary  pieces,  etc.,  in  the 
two  Tutors  noticed,  but  in  none  of  them  does  the  music  descend  lower 
than  C.  The  7  th  and  8  th  strings  were  probably  only  used  for  advanced 
pieces  or  for  accompaniments. 


THE  APOLLO  LYRE,  LYRE,  AND  FRENCH  LYRE 

The  Apollo  Lyre,  an  engraving  of  which  appears  upon  Bolton's  Tutor 
and  is  here  reproduced,  is  also  mentioned  by  Busby,  Light,  and  Ventura. 
This  is  an  English  instrument  which  may  occasion- 
ally be  met  with.  Carl  Engel  named  it  the  "  Lyre 
Guitar."  The  writer,  in  a  letter  to  Mvsical  Opinion, 
asked  if  any  of  the  readers  could  state  positively 
that  "Lyre  Guitar"  was  in  use  before  Carl  Engel's 
Catalogue  appeared  ;  to  which  there  was  no  reply. 
If  it  cannot  be  proved  that  "Lyre  Guitar"  appeared 
in  print  before  the  publication  of  Carl  Engel's  Cata- 
logue, it  may  be  concluded  that  he  invented  a  name 
for  an  instrument  about  which  he  had  no  information. 
This  instrument  was  tuned,  like  the  English  Guitar, 
to  C  E  G  C  E  G.  Large  instruments  formed  like 
the  Apollo  Lyre  were  made.  These  had  stands  and  eleven  strings,  four 
of  which  in  the  bass  were  off  the  finger-board.  These  instruments  could 
have  been,  and  probably  were,  tuned  precisely  as  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar 
to  be  hereafter  noticed.^ 

An  instrument  called  the  Lyre  is  referred  to  by  Light,  Bolton,  and 
Ventura,  but  the  writer  is  unable  to  state  whether  or  not  the  Lyre  and 
Apollo  Lyre  were  the  same. 

'  When  ]ilaying  in  the  key  of  G  the  seventh 
string  should  be  tuned  FJj!.  There  is  a  statement 
in  the  Tutor  that  when  playing  in  the  key  of  F 
the  fourth  string  should  be  tuned  to  Bb.  This 
may  refer  to  the  tuning  of  that  string  upon 
the  Harp-Lute,  the  scale  of  which  Bolton  gives, 
and  the  difference  between  that  instrument  and 
the    Harp-Guitar    he    explains.       He    may    have 


intended  his  Tutor  to  be  used  for  the  Harp- Lute, 
as  he  refers  to  the  short  finger-board.  In  one 
piece  directions  are  given  to  fix  the  "  pedal  "  for 
producing  F  i{  as  a  passing  accidental  ;  so  it  would 
appear  that  Levien's  instrument,  to  be  hereafter 
referred  to,  was  in  use. 

-  Light  advertised  in  the  Times,  27th  January 
1817,  his  improved  Lyre  of  twelve  strings. 


APOLLO    -    LYRE 
WITH     ADDITIONAL    STRINGS 


THE    HAllP-GUITAE  33 

The  French  Lyre  is  an  instrument  very  similar  in  form  to  the  Apollo 
Lyre.  It  usually  has  a  stand.  The  writer  has  before  him  CaruUi's  In- 
structions for  the  Spanish  Guitar  or  French  Lyre,  published  by  C.  Wheat- 
stone  and  Co.  The  title-page  has  to  a  large  extent  been  re-engraved 
apparently  to  allow  "  French  Lyre  "  to  be  introduced.  We  find  that  at 
the  foot  of  page  1  the  following  has  been  added :  "  N.B. — The  Editors  of 
this  work  has  the  honor  to  announce  that  having  been  permitted  to  take 
a  Model  from  an  elegant  French  Lyre,  made  in  Paris,  for  a  family  of 
distinction  in  this  Country.  They  are  having  manufactured  an  assort- 
ment of  them  by  an  eminent  Italian  Maker  lately  Arrived  from  Paris. 
The  Scale  of  this  Instrument  is  the  same  as  the  Spanish  Guittar." 

MUSIC 

All  music  for  the  English  Guitar  can  with  the  same  ease  be  played 
upon  the  Harp-Guitar  or  upon  the  Apollo  Lyre. 

Upon  the  last  sheet  of  one  of  Bolton's  works  there  is  a  statement  that 
a  collection  of  music  for  the  Guitar  or  Lyre,  Op.  9,  might  be  obtained 
from  Messrs.  Goulding  and  Co.  Also  some  music  for  the  Lyre  might 
be  had  from  Mr.  Wornum,  Wigmore  Street. 

A  portion  of  a  Collection  of  Airs,  Marches,  and  Dances  by  Bolton  was 
evidently  for  the  Lyre  or  Lute.  He  also  produced  a  collection  of  Lessons, 
Songs,  Marches,  and  Dances  for  the  Lyre  or  Harp-Lute. 

Bolton  also  arranged  some  of  the  Songs  and  Airs  in  Don  Giovanni, 
together  with  a  number  of  other  melodies,  for  the  Harp-Lute  or  Harp- 
Guitar.     These  were  published  by  C.  Wheatstone. 

F.  Chabran  prepared  "An  Elegant  Selection  of  Songs,  etc.,  adapted 
for  the  Spanish  or  Harp-Lute-Guitar."  These  were  published  in  two 
books  by  C.  Wheatstone  and  Co.,  Strand.  A  number  of  the  pieces  are 
headed  for  the  Harp-Guitar  and  Lyi'e. 

Edward  Light  published  an  "  Introduction  to  the  art  of  Playing  on 
the  Harp-Lute  and  Apollo  Lyre." 


E 


34 


MUSICAL    IXSTEUMEXTS 


Voice 


Lute 


DRINK    TO   ME  ONLY,     nccompt     by  T:Bolton, 

V 

-J- 


Dnnk  to  me     on  —  ly    viih  thine     eyes    And       I      will  pledg-evith    mme^ 


c=rr  nrf  r  m^^^ 


Or   leave   ■  kis*  KitVi     in     the  Cop. And    111  not     look    for      -w-ine    -    ~ 


■^  ^    J   . 


=^   u-^T 


? 


The  thir»t  that  from  the  sonl  doth  rise. 

Doth   ask  a  drink   diYine; 
The  lhir»t  that  from  tlie  sotil  doth  ri«e, 

Doth  ask  a  drink  divine. 
Bat  might  I  of  3ovtf%  Nectar  snp, 
I  voald  not  change  for  thine « 
The   thirst  that  from  the  soul  doth  Tise> 
Doth  ask   a  drink  divine. 

(  B*lton' 


I  sent  thee  late  a  Rosie  wreath. 

Not  BO  mnch  hon'ring  thee. 
As  giving  it  a  hope  that  there, 

It  could  not   ^-ither'd  he  s 
Btit  thou  thereon  didst  only  breathe. 

And  sent  it  back  to  me. 
Since  nhenit  looks, and  smells,!  swear. 
Not  of  Itself  bnt  Thee  . 


THE    HAEP-GUITAR 


35 


JULIA  TO  THE  WOOD  ROBIN. 


(Ai«p«eJ    by  T.  Bolton  J 


note*    of  love, "While    my  fond   Heart    responds   to  thee  ,  O     war   _    -  ble 


still  tnose         notes  of  love    .        "While  my  fond 


prt  pn,^  r^iin  mijTi  j^i 


Heart         re  —    sponds  to  thee  .  O         thee  . 


Rest   thy  soft  Bosom  on  the   spray. 
Till  chilly  Autumn  frowns   seTere^ 
A  Then  charm  me  with  thy  parting  lay. 
And  1  -will  ansver -with  a  tear.*;^'. 


But  soon  as  Spring  enwreath'A with  floors. 
Come  dancing  o'er  the  new  drest  plain, 
JB,  Return  and  cheer  thy  natal    bow'rs  , 

My   Robin  with  these  notes  again. y. 


^  B«l  Ion's    In  It,'  ') 


36 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


Maestoso - 


The  DUKE   of  YO  RK's  March 


^inii^i^i  fiijfrtfj^irr/'jl'-i^f  f 


p^-^^^\  fli!li^im.ri:  ^  ^01  ^  ^  piff  I 


fr.rri^rrfi^;:rG^rM 


^l-ljnJJ.ii^j^l^^'^Lf^!.g;f^-f 


i<hii^^tr[f\]'fif\f''Uff:uUf\nrt 

\J  -9-  ^ 


£ 


P 


■^rf^grirff 


imtfMirm^ 


^£ 


J-H  • » ftfr 


i 


I  I  » M  \ j     Hi 


i~p-  <i/i 


The  Maid  of  Lodi 


who     sweet. ly    sang^    to      me  whose 


*^        1        sing'    tne    iviaicl    ot      L,oai  wno     sweet. ly    sang^    to      me  whose 


i 


■    f^r  flp^i'^l^lt 


<m 


r  1  !■ 


^ 


i 


)«y  brows  where  never    clouflv  nor      e  er    distent    with     glee  she     vahies     not  tne 


f 


m=ni 


f^l^^t^^ 


S^^l.fJ".  '  3- 


& 


e=^i^ 


£S^ 


-*i 


P   •     r 


/     L 


wealthy  un -lets  they're  grent  and  good         for     she    is      stron;-:   and    healthy         and 


t^^^f^faj;j0^j^^i^^^"3-k^^ 


Harp  Giiittar  Ttator 


THE    HARP-GUITAE 


37 


i'l  r  ^ 


=^ 


w=ft 


? 


$ 


1    r 


^ 


XC 


IZ 


i^ 


when    her  Days-works  over  around  a  chearful    fire  She    sings   or    rests   con 


^jn  ii-^\}i^m 


^  rp  I  ff^ 


•     \* 


* 4- 


^ 


P~W^. 


P  1    r  P 


^g-PT    r    F 


* 


^1^1;. 


^ 


tz^ 


tented  what  more  can  Man  de .  sire  let    those  who   sqandar  millions  re  _ 


view  her  happy      lot  They  find  their  proud  Pavillions  far  in  _  fe  -  rior    to   her 


UiOoJ\\r^ii'\\\^i  I'^ij.iiJ  ii^ 


Between  the  Po  and  Farm  * 

Some  Villains    seiz'd  my  Coach 

And  dragg'd  me  to  a  Cavern 
Most  dreadfiil  to  approach 

By  which  the  Maid  of  Lodi 

Came  trotting  from  the  fair 

She  paas'd  to  hear  my  wailings 
And  see  me  tear  my  hair. 

Among-  the  mild  Madonas 

Her  features  yoi:  may  find 
But  not  the  fain'd  Correggios 
Could  ever  paint  her  mind 


Then  to  her  Market-basket 
She  tied  her  Poney's  rein 

I  thus  by  female  courage 
Was  dragg'd  to  life  again 

She  led  me  to  her  dwelling 

She  chearVl  my  heart  with  Wine 

And  then  she  deck'd  a  table 

At  which  the  Gods  might  dine. 

Then  sing  the  Maid  of  Lodi 

Who  sweetly  sang  to  me 
And  when  this  Maid  is  married 
Still   happier  may  she  be. 


Harp  Guitar  Tutor 


38 


MUSICAL    INSTEUME^•TS 


Andante 


Hope  told  a  flattring  tale 


HoPE,toldaflatt'rihK    tale  ftat  joyM-oa'dsoon  re 


tng^ 


rTnfif  F  f  nrr^iJ,  r-l  i 


^ 


-^-^ 


*^.  turn         Ah!  nonj;ht  my  sig^s  a  .  .  vail      for  Love     is  doomd  to     mourn 


Ah! 


^jyj'ij-j^tTTjT^i^^ijjVf.M-t^^ 


r  r  "^  ^  i~r '  1 1  D'Tt  r  r  c 


i^r    r    r 


:3=3r 


wheres  the  flatt  rer  gone  from 


from  me    for    e  .  ver 


flown  for  Love    is  dooin'd  to       monrn      An  noj.g^t  my  sighs  b  .   .  vail  for 


^-^M^r..r^f-ricj';,i;i^r,rt.i'^nr.iVi-^ 


oer         and     Lift 


can  charm  no    more       can  charm  no    more 


*^         ^"^  al  Sef;Tio 


Hnrp  Giiitfar  Tutor 


THE    HAEP-GUITAE 


39 


COPENHAGEN     "VVALTZ.      ,.      „     ,,     ^  „„,,„„ 

Var."     by      l.DOlton. 


Cre» 


Var:I. 


—9 — = — 1 

!H^ 

f=M3 

_- 

pi 

•- 

1 — irf-n 

ffi 

rfn 

•-. 

■  ^    P 

-  *   s- 

»-] 

MV 

%=H 

W^ 

? 

k^ 

a 

LI 
B 

dErPriJ 

^ 

r^H^-^i^ 

^ 

3 

1 

ttfe^:4=a  riH  Id  J  *  I  [-ii-  ria  *  \f\^  *  L^m  ^  ng  i/  ''lata 


j;  sj  J'  fjfjJ-riEj  J'  fj^mfs^^tfigf  JCi',;SjjTf:ftTttr 


/'  / 


("Bolton'j  Inji,') 


40 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


A.  favorite  Air  with  Variations 


*J    Andante  ^"  ' 


Andante 


fWdVfrii(i4'yidiV^/;'W,'-^^di'i/Ajrirt^[ 


Fti''cfi'^f%'WVi 


#-» — p 


^^p 


I                        art  Jib  1      "•Tempo 
t5 ^r,.!, - #.    .« 


lijWVVytrrcr/^W^-^-^ 


^  ##i,^/r^D'i/fr^£f;f  fjfri|Hi^^ 


j  I  jyi;,'i»i'^/jlWy//j\Wi^fig  II 


Harp  Guitar  Tutor 


THE    GUITARE-HARPE 


MoRDAUNT  Levien  of  London,  as  before  stated,  took  out  a  patent  in 
France  in  1825  for  an  improved  instrument  which  he  called  the  Guitare- 
Harpe.'  This  instrument,  which  is  of  the  same  form  as  Light's  Harp- 
Guitar,  difters  from  the  latter  in  having  only  seven  strings  and  having  at 
the  back  of  the  neck  three  brass  stops,  for  which  Levien  probably  obtained 
a  patent.  These  stops,  which,  when  pressed  by  the  thumb,  act  as  nuts, 
were  called  by  the  inventor  pedals,  and  will  be  hereafter  referred  to. 

The  following  are  the  measurements  of  one  of  Levien's  Guitare- 
Harpes "' :  27|-  inches  from  nut  to  end,  20  inches  from  nut  to  bridge, 
twelve  frets,  the  lowest  being  9  inches  from  the  bridge  ;  the  greatest 
width  of  the  sounding-board,  12|^  inches.  For  this  instrument,  which  is 
much  more  frequently  met  with  than  Light's,  Levien  prepared  a  Tutor, 
which  was  published  at  Paris,^  from  which  the  following  has  been 
extracted  : — 

1st  Example. 


i 


7" 
C 


+ 


The  seven  open  strings. 


3"- 

E 


41* 
G 


c 


1" 

E £_ 


n     II     II     II     II  "  II    B 


4 


2nd  Example. 


3rd  Example. 


>  1q  an  illustrated  catalogue  of  Musical  Instru- 
ments by  J.  KenJrick  Pyne,  No.  [i2A,  the  name 
Lute-Guitar  is  given  to  a  specimen.  Dr.  Pyne 
states  that  he  purchased  a  MS.  Instruction  Book 
along  with  the  instrument,  on  which  that  title 
appeared,    and    he,    supposing    it   to    be   correct, 


inserted  it  in  the  catalogue. 

'^  The  property  of  ilr.  J.  G.  Morley. 

*  Mr.  H.  Journet,  of  43  Tottenham  Court 
Road,  London,  has  most  obligingly  allowed  the 
writer  the  use  of  his  copy  of  this  rare  work. 


42 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Scale, 


with  the  denomination  of  the  notes  and  their  fingering. 

I"  Slrine 

.IL  1  J  _^ 


G 


gH,  ^  ^\k  grd  gnd 

CD        EFGAB        CD        EF        cA 


B      C 


D        E 


F      C 


ijM, 


Left  Hand.       q 
Right  Hand.    + 


O     2 


4       b       2       b     I       U       2" 


+     f        +++     +     +»        I        223 


3      3       5 


3        S       3      3 


O.  the  open  strings  ;    + ,  the  thumb  ;   1,  the  first  finger  ;  2,  the  second  finger;  3,  the  third  finger  j 

4,  the  fourth  finger. 

Scale  of  two  octaves  in  C  Major,  rising  and  descending. 

^rff,ffi 


Finger- Board  of  the  Guitare-Harpe. 


10      L     "      ^     1* 


1st 

2nd 

3id 

4th 

5th 

6th 
7  th 


From  this  diagram  it  appears  that  the  7th  string  is  only  used  as  an 
open  string.  The  writer  has  carefully  examined  a  quantity  of  music, 
and  in  no  case  did  A  or  B  appear  as  bass  notes. 

method  of  tuning  the  guitare-harpe 

The  first  three  strings  are  tuned  by  thirds,  and  the  others  by  their 
lower  octaves.  The  surest  way  for  beginners  is  to  tune  the  third  string  C 
by  another  instrument,  then  the  finger  is  placed  above  its  fourth  fret, 
which  produces  E  ;  the  second  string  is  tuned  in  unison,  and  from  the 


THE    GUITAEE-HAKPE 


43 


third  fret  of  this  string  the  first  is  tuned  in  unison  with  it ;  the  other 
strings  are  tuned  to  the  octave  below — that  is  to  say,  the  fourth  is  tuned 
from  the  first  string,  the  fifth  from  the  second,  the  sixth  from  the  third, 
and  the  seventh  from  the  fourth,  an  octave  lower. 

From  the  representation  of  the  finger-board,  the  directions  for  timing 
that  have  just  been  given,  and  the  music  for  the  Guitare-Harpe  and  Piano, 
it  would  appear  that  Levien's  instrument  should  be  tuned  to  the  written 
notes.' 

Scale  of  C  Major,  rising  and  descending,  with  the 
principal  Chords. 


#rtffg^«^Tc;ii:r;%:r:rtC'icr:rtr^^ 


± 


m 


f 


Prelude  No.  1,  for  exercising  the  right  hand. 


^^^^^f^^^^^^^^^ 


gE 


Pedal  sign 


The  pedals  of  brass — which  are  placed  at  the  back  of  the  neck  or 
finger-board  of  the  instrument,  viz.  :  the  1st  under  the  fourth  string,  for 
giving  the  A  ;  the  2nd  under  the  fifth  string,  for  giving  the  F ;  and  the 


'   Later  on  the  reader  will  also  find  that  those 
who  improved  and  wrote  for  the  Harpe-Lute  did 


not  follow  Light's  tuning  of  that  iustrument. 


44  MUSICAL   INSTEUMENTS 

3rd  under  the  sixth  string,  for  giving  D — are  pressed  by  the  thumb  of 
the  left  hand  during  certain  passages  of  the  music,  which  otherwise  would 
necessitate  much  crossing  of  the  fingers.' 

ABRIDGMENT  OF  THE  RULE  OF  TRANSPOSITION 

When  an  air  does  not  suit  the  voice  in  the  key  in  which  it  is  written, 
but  suits  perfectly  in  another  key,  or  a  piece  of  music  is  more  difficult  to 
execute  in  one  key  than  in  another,  it  is  necessary  to  transpose  the  music. 

Supposing  an  air  in  E  flat  is  too  difficult,  to  transpose  it  into  the  key 
of  C  (which  is  the  easiest  key  for  the  instrument)  each  note  must  be 
lowered  a  third,  and  the  Capo-testo  must  be  fixed  on  the  third  space  ;  it 
will  then  be  played  in  the  original  key  of  E  flat,  as  if  there  had  been 
no  transposition.  In  order  to  transpose  from  A  to  F,  each  note  will  be  a 
third  lower,  and,  having  fixed  the  Capo-testo  on  the  fourth  space,  it  can 
then  be  played  in  the  original  key  of  A.  But  if  the  transposition  of  this 
key  a  third  lower  is  too  low  for  the  instrument,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
transpose  it  to  F,  a  sixth  above,  and,  having  fixed  the  Capo-testo  on  the 
fourth  space,  it  can  then  be  played  in  the  key  of  A,  an  octave  higher.  If, 
however,  some  of  these  transpositions  are  too  high  or  too  low,  the 
Capo-testo  can  be  placed  higher  or  lower  to  suit  the  voice. 

Before  fixing  the  Capo-testo  it  is  necessary  to  lower  the  seventh 
string  half  a  tone. 

GENERAL  RULE  FOR  ACCOMPANIMENT 

The  first  note  of  the  key  or  key-note  should  be  accompanied  by  the 
third  and  by  the  fifth. 

The  second,  or  sub-mediant,  by  the  minor  third,  the  perfect  fourth, 
and  the  major  sixth. 

The  third,  or  mediant,  by  the  third  and  the  sixth. 

The  fourth,  or  sub-dominant,  by  the  third  and  the  fifth ;  but  when  it 
is  found  preceded  by  the  fifth  note  of  the  key,  it  is  accompanied  by  the 
second,  major  fourth,  and  the  sixth. 

The  fifth,  or  dominant,  by  the  fourth  and  the  sixth,  or  by  the  major 
third  and  the  fifth. 

The  sixth,  by  the  third  and  the  sixth. 

I  Of  the  tweiity-thiee  airs  in  the  Tutor  only       eight  advanced  jiieces  examined  are  pedal  marks 

one   has   the   ptilal    luurUs,    ami  in    none   of   the       given. 


THE    GUITAEE-HARPE 


45 


The  seventh  above  is  called  the  leading  note,  and  it  is  accompanied 
with  the  third,  the  minor  fifth,  and  the  sixth.  In  descending,  it  is  simply 
called  the  seventh,  and  it  is  accompanied  by  the  third  and  the  sixth. 

It  should  be  observed  that  the  third  on  the  first  note  of  the  key  ought 
to  be  major  in  major  keys  and  minor  in  minor  keys  ;  thus  all  the  inter- 
vals which  are  not  specified  are  always  relative  to  their  principal  note. 

Harmonic  Scales  for  Accompaniments. 


These  two  scales  in  C  major  and  A  minor  will  serve  as  models  for  all  others,  either  major  or  minor. 


Air  with  various  Accompaniments. 

_« «_ 


46  MUSICAL   INSTRUMENTS 

In  conclusion,  it  may  be  mentioned  that  in  the  music  for  the  instru- 
ment the  writer  has  examined,  the  signs  indicating  harmonic  sounds 
only  occur  when  the  notes  are  open. 

MUSIC 

The  following  by  Mordaunt  Levieu  appear  in  the  Catalogue  of  Music 
for  the  Guitare-Harpe  : — 

M6thode  pour  Guitare-Harpe,  Parts  T.  and  II. 

Solftge  ou  Methode  de  Chant,  avec  accompagnement  de  Guitare-Harpe. 

Recueil  de  Valses. 

La  Chasse. 

Deux  airs  varies  (Aussitot  que  la  lumiere)  et  (Nel  cor  piii  iion  mi  .sento). 

Senate. 

Theme  vari6. 

Kobin  Adair  (Air  Eoossais)  vari6. 

Fantaisie. 

Six  contredanses  suivies  de  la  Valse  et  du  Choeur  de  Robin  des  bois, 

Kelvingrove  (Air  Eoossais). 

Fantaisie  sur  la  Marche  favorite  de  Mose  in  Egitto. 

Divertimento. 

Six  divertissements. 

Six  favourite  English  songs. 

Recueil  d'airs  Suisses. 

Recueil  d'airs  Ecossais. 

Recueil  de  douze  Morceaux  pour  une  ou  deux  Guitare-Harpes. 

Variations  idem. 

Air  Tyrolien  vari6  idem. 

Air  Portugais  vari(^  idem. 

Divertissement  pour  Guitare-Harpe,  et  Piano. 

Fantaisie  pour  Guitare-Harpe,  et  Piano,  Tiolon,  ou  Flute. 

Sonate  pour  Guitare-Harpe  et  Violon. 

The  following  are  by  Bayard  : — 
Variations  sur  la  Viennoise. 
Deux  Themes  varies  idem  (Fieuve  du  tage)  (Et  un  air  favoride  Steibelt). 


THE    GUITARE-HAKPE 


Andantinfi 


NEL  COK  PIU  NON  MI  SENTO. 


i-.i-i 


lA^ir. 


-,|rVi?rrrTr^^jjJii5:JrTr^|-^^ 


iVVa 


is^-,fp|ifPifPi;^  ,rM^/?^^^E^ 


r 


48 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


NEL  COR  Pit  NON  MI  SENTO— 2. 


^ 


THE    GUITARE-HARPE 


49 


NEL  COR  Pit  NON  MI  SENTO— 3. 


^■i^g^ 


j^^:m:jfirm^ 


WW^.r-'^V-r 


(.!...■  |,»r  m".""  nepvei 


G 


50 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


All'.'  Mod? 

I 

SON  AT  K  .    ^^   '~j^^g 


G  U  I  T  \  K  E 


1    J>     .-4-^-?^g= 


■fT* *=^ 


V    "^r — r- 


r 


6-^  .       »  ^  6-^A, 


>l        f.«*,       f  V    f_^-,-£?J^g-:fe">^^-T 


^S^^^^^fe. 


THE   GUITARE-HARPE 

SONATE— 2. 


51 


5^-i»,  ^^*_*,*^, 


52 


MUSICAL   INSTKUMENTS 


SONATE— 3. 

1. 1  I  TAKK  . 


^=^^0h0^ftK?f--^rki^-.^  -J  I  f  jjr  I 


,t,   ■  rthiatOMW 


HARP-LUTE-  GUITAR. 


THE    HARP-LUTE-GUITAR 

It  must  have  been  shortly  after  the  invention  of  the  Harp-Guitar  that 
it  occurred  to  Edward  Li^ht  to  attach  a  head  somewhat  similar  to  that 
of  the  Theorbo  or  double-headed  Lute  to  a  body  and  neck  resembling 
those  of  his  Hai'p-Guitar,  and,  by  filling  up  the  gaps  between  C  and  E 
and  E  and  G  in  the  bass,  provide  the  instrument  with  a  complete 
octave  of  open  bass  strings.  This  new  instrument,  one  of  the  most 
elegant  of  Light's  inventions,  he  called  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar.  On  the 
finger-board  he  placed  seven  strings,  and  from  a  separate  nut  three  bass 
strings.  Of  this  ten-stringed  instrument,  a  fine  specimen  is  represented 
in  the  illustration.^  An  additional  bass  string  G  was  afterwards  added, 
and  when  so  far  perfected,  "Edward  Light  Inventor"^  published  the 
"Art  of  Playing"  on  the  Harp-Lute- Guitar,^  a  work  so  rare,  that  the 
writer  may  be  excused  for  reprinting  not  only  the  curiously  worded 
Introduction,  but  such  other  portions  as  appear  desirable. 


"a  shokt  account  of  the  newly  invented  harp-lute-guitae " ^ 

"The  Harp-Lute-Guitar,  so  call'd,  from  the  structure  of  it,  partaking 
partly  of  the  Harp,  partly  of  the  Lute,  and  partly  of  the  Guitar.  This 
little   Instrument  is   confessedly  greatly  superior  to   any  other  of  it's 

'  The  instrument  is  tbe  property  of  the  Messrs.  which    no    proof   has    been    produced    cannot    !ie 

Glen,  Edinburgh.     The  following  are  the  measure-  accepted    when   an   Instruction   Book   giving   the 

raents  :    Extreme   length,  3Si   inches  ;    from    the  correct  name  of  tbe  instrument,  "  The  Harp-Lute- 

uut  for  the  bass  strings  to  lower  end,  31|  inches  ;  Guitar,"  is  extant.     An  explanation  of  an  obsolete 

from  the  nut  on  the  ttnger-board  to  the  lower  end,  term,  or  a  name  for  an  obsolete  musical  instrument, 

23J  inches  ;  from  the  nut  for  the  bass  strings  to  when  given  without  conclusive  evidence,  cannot 

bridge,  25^  inches ;  from  the  nut  on  the  fingerboard  be  too  severely  condemned. 

to  bridge,  17i  inches  ;  across  the  sounding-board  ■•  For  the  use  of  this  interesting  work,  and  also 

at  the  widest  part,  12  inches.  for   the   use    of   the    volume   of    Airs,   etc.,   with 

^  A  tine  specimen  with  eleven  strings,  "Light  Pianoforte  Accompaniments,  the  writer  is  indebted 

Mr.  Barry  maker,"  is  amongst  the  collection  of  to  Mr.  Glen,  of   Bank  Street,    Edinburgli.       The 

the  Rev.  F.  W.  Galpin.  Instruction  Book  was  prepared  shortly  after  ISOO, 

^  Carl   Engel  calls  this  instrument  the  "  Harji  during  which  year  Sir  Edward  Hunter-Blair  suc- 

Theorbo,"  and  the  specimens  in  the  South  Reusing-  ceeded  to  the  Baronetcy,  the  tune  which  is  known 

ton  Mu.seum  are   so  labelled.     A  statement  for  by  his  name  appearing  amongst  those  in  tbe  book. 


54 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


size  and  kind,  the  Inventor  gives  this  short  account,  to  shew  wherein 
it  differs  from,  and  particularly  excells  others.  First,  by  containing  a 
greater  number  of  Strings,  which  not  only  renders  it  more  easy  to  play 
on,  but  the  Tones  are  also  more  perfect  by  having  the  more  open 
Notes ;  secondly,  what  further  militates  in  favor  of  the  Harp  Lute,  is, 
that  being  tun'd  to  Harp  pitch,  they  charmingly  unite  with  and  accom- 
pany the  Voice,  likewise  afford  a  very  pleasing  accompaniment  to  the 
Piano  Forte  and  other  Instruments,  and  thirdly  that  from  the  simple 
construction  of  them  and  being  strung  with  Harp  Strings  conduces  to 
produce  the  admir'd  sound  of  real  Harps,  and  are  therby  less  liable 
of  going  soon  out  of  tune.  Lastly,  by  way  of  observation,  many 
attempts  have  been  made  to  introduce  portable  Instruments  for  Ladies 
accommodation,  such  as  the  English  Guitar,  Spanish  Guitar,  Mandola, 
Mandoline,  and  latterly  the  Lyre  and  Lute,  the  Inventor  of  the  Harp 
Lute  disdaining  to  depreciate  the  merits  of  other  Men's  productions, 
will  therefore  here  decline  making  comparisons,  leaving  that  to  a  well 
inform'd  Public  who  in  their  wisdom,  are  best  entitled  clearly  to  judge 
of,  and  allow  what  degree  of  merit  if  any,  may  be  found  due  to 
'  Light's.'  " 

Scale  for  the  Harp -Lute -Guitar. 

r  D  E  F  G 

gA  Bgr  2  £i 


I 


D    E    F 


G   A    B    c 


D 


iS 


O- 


E  F 

0    1 


mm 


i 


i 


f 


#-1 


+  1 


2     3    +    12^1 


2    2 


Manner  of  practicing*  the  Scale 


1*.  Octave  ascending  &  descending.  24 Octave 


jujiiiJiiiuJiJjJi»l[iai[y^ 


PreludfS  in  F  and  G  are  jjiven  near  tho  end  of  the  volume,  also  the  (4aniut  in  F,  the 
])erfornier  being  directed  to  tunc  the  fourlli  string  to  Bb.  The  Gamut  in  G  is  missing, 
l)ut  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  F  string  should  be  tuned  to  FC  to  avoid  the 
difficulty  of  reaching  to  the  seventh  string. 


THE    HAEP-LUTE-GUITAE 


55 


METHOD   OF   TUNING   THE   HAEP-LUTE -GUITAR 

"  First,  tune  your  third  string  to  the  pitch  of  E  flat,  being  to  the  sound 
of  the  tuning-fork  given  with  it ;  then  proceed  to  tune  all  the  other 
strings  according  to  the  following  example  : — Note  when  you  have  hxed 
the  pitch  note  to  the  sound  of  the  fork,  press  on  the  fourth  fret  of  that 
string,  being  the  red  or  third  string,  and  tune  your  second  in  unison  to 
it ;  then  press  the  second  string  on  the  third  fret,  and  tune  the  first  in 
unison  to  it." 


Ex: 


3^  String.2^String.l^*String.'IVial . 


T7    PiidT 


^^ 


By  Octaves  downwards . 


f^^M 


Trial 


M 


i 


25 


r^ 


From  the  foregoing  extracts  it  will  be  seen  that  the  open  strings  of 
the  Harp-Lute-Guitar  in  the  original  key  of  C  are  fingered  exactly 
in  the  same  manner  as  those  of  the  Pedal  Harp,  the  X  indicating  the 
thumb,  and  the  1,  2,  and  3  the  first,  second,  and  third  fingers,  with  this 
difference,  that,  as  the  longest  strings  are  nearest  to  the  performer,  the 
fingering  is  reversed.  It  may  also  be  remarked  that  although  the 
Harp-Lute-Guitar  is  tuned  one-sixth  lower  than  the  written  notes  when 
played  singly,  when  played  in  conjunction  with  the  Pianoforte  it  is 
tuned  a  tone  lower,  its  pitch  being  then  a  seventh  lower  than  its 
notation  indicates.  Thus,  in  a  volume  of  Songs,  Airs,  Marches,  Rondos, 
etc.,  by  E.  Light,  for  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar,  with  accompaniments  for 
the  Piano,  when  the  accompaniment  is  in  D,  the  music  for  the  Harp- 
Lute-Guitar  is  in  C  ;  when  the  accompaniment  is  in  G,  the  music  for  the 
Harp-Lute-Guitar  is  in  F ;  and  when  the  accompaniment  is  in  A,  the 
music  for  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar  is  in  G.  In  the  Introduction  to  the 
Tutor  it  is  stated  that  Harp  strings  are  used  for  this  instrument,  and  the 
reference  to  the  C  or  red  string  bears  this  out.  With  the  knowledge 
that  the  instrument  is  to  be  tuned  a  major  sixth  below  the  written  notes, 


56  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

and  with  the  illustration  of  the  finger-board,  a  possessor  of  one  of  these 
instruments  can  with  little  difficulty  provide  it  with  the  proper  strings, 
the  C  strings  being,  of  course,  red  and  the  F  string  black  or  blue.' 

On  the  instrument  illustrated,  the  strings,  which  are  certainly  old, 
are  for  the  most  part  sUk  and  silver ;  the  following  being  the  gauge 
of  each : — 

1st.  Gut,  D,  2nd  Octave. 

2nd.  Missing. 

3rd.  Silver,  F,  3rd  Octave. 

4th.  Silver,  D,  3rd  Octave. 

5th.  Silver,  C,  3rd  Octave. 

6th.  Silver,  B,  3rd  Octave. 

7th.  Silver,  A,  3rd  Octave. 

8th.  Silver,  F,  3rd  Octave. 

9th.  Silver,  E,  4th  Octave. 

10th.  Silver,  D,  4th  Octave. 

The  Harp-Lute-Guitar  is  held  slantingly  across  the  chest  and  is 
supported  by  a  ribbon  attached  to  the  head  and  to  the  button  at  the 
lower  end  of  the  body. 

MUSIC 

In  the  Tutor  before  referred  to  there  are,  besides  preludes  and  lessons, 
some  thirty-three  airs,  etc.,  arranged  for  the  instrument ;  and  in  the 
volume  of  "  Songs,  Airs,  Marches,  Rondos,  etc.,  adapted  for  the  Harp- 
Lute-Guitar,  with  an  Accompaniment  for  the  Pianoforte,  by  E.  Light," 
there  are,  besides  the  Introduction,  twenty  pieces.  The  writer  cannot 
say  what  additional  music  Light  published  for  this  instrument.  The 
specimens  reproduced  have  been  selected  from  the  two  works  referred  to. 

F.  Chabran  prepared  "  An  Elegant  Selection  of  Songs,  Spanish 
Boleros,  etc.,  adapted  for  the  Spanish  or  Harp-Lute-Guitar."  These 
were  published  in  two  books  by  C.  Wheatstone  and  Co.,  136  Strand. 
Such  pieces  as  were  not  intended  for  the  Spanish  Guitar  are  in  the  keys 
of  C  and  F. 

'   If    coloured    strings    of    the    proper    gauge       ordinary  clear  or  white  strings.      When  dry,  olivt 
cannot   be   procured,    a]iply  red   or  black   ink   to       oil  should  be  rubbed  over  them. 


FINGER-BOARD  OF  THE  IfARF  LUTE-GUITAR. 

H 


58 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

Practical  Lessons . 


Preludio  1. 


On  the  Common  Chord 


fp-Mff^ijifi 


i^&t^/ffi^:rafPi^^^ 


Preludio  4 


f000^^^m 


THE    HAEP-LUTE-GUITAE 


59 


Prelude  9. 


^^ 


^^^^^^^ 


^^rf^^^^ 


60 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


Lesson 


r\'M'!^^^'^^^Ju'i^m 


All?  moderato 


^ 


ffm^i^nn-im[rifjjffifj^ 


Wiill^^iiisl^^WWs^^ 


^mM^m  dlr^i'r^ftg%^^p 


^^^^^^ta^ 


^^^ 


^^^^^^^ 


^Ff^ 


THE   HARP-LUTE-GUITAR 


61 


INTRODUCTION. 


Tp^t^tf^f#t7~|Tr  r  r  J I  f  f 


cres 


cres 


Si 


^ 


^^^^^ 


/  ffl'lU'l  Mill 


#  ■  ,  I  g-r4i 


iUVinvint-- 


^ 


&^ 


#-f# 


^^t/if\rr^t^T  I  fIJ  fr  rif  J^' 


^m 


xi 


.^^^^^^r^rurrrirj^ 


62 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


i 


']  Cririf-Pf^ 


^ 


Allegi-etto 


S 


^ 


^ 


23 


^ 


/  'I  ^r|r•t'^r^^ 


girii  FP  r^  I  J^.pi^  I  jf;^rirT 


^E 


^ 


^ 


Ptt 


jf  ^  r  ri>r.Tr 


^ 


^S 


THE    HAEP-LUTE-GUITAR 


63 


^^^m 


L 


^ 


^^^^a^^^ 


1    ^  ri   i   ^ 


fcca^ 


; 


^^^^^^^^m 


^ 


^ 


i)'    J    i  ^  1 1   ?  F^ 


,,,..pr[Tir^r^iti'i^ 


^s 


^ 


3 


U 


64 


MUSICAL    I  N  S  T  E  U  M  E  N  T  S 


P 


# 


L 


^ 


E 


I 


^=^ 


fe± 


:2l: 


^^jg'iJfrjffiiJ''ifiJ['iTW/ftDtp 


s 


f  11  fj  fij  r  i=f=f^ 


ri 


»  ■  # 


#  1  mv''i'\'\ 


g#p# 


pjJSjjphffjJtfjPi^^p 


'^■^•^i*  a- 


^^f 


CT       I    q 


THE   HAEP-LUTE    GUITAK 


65 


i 


X 


^^ 


"  '  M         — r^=~ 


if: 


^^ 


m 


p5 


* w 


*      # 


^ 


^ 


li I 


m^ifiirilirnfff^ 


1  rrnrn* 


I  III"  ^  I  M  ^  f  ^f  ^^Ffrj-r 


r^^y'ig^i^ji 


^^E 


^ 


f^rNffirrif 


^ 


66 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


Adagio 


fjp^^nphv^wfrr 


■f#-r 


i 


^te 


^^^ 


^ 


Allegretto 


^^^^^^^^g 


MU'lPi'FtlF-^' 


-/|_rL;irg^fif^jf|^4^ 


^^ 


HARP-LUTE. 

WITH       TWELVE       S.  TRINC 


THE    HARP-LUTE 

Elegant  as  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar  undoubtedly  is,  Edward  Light 
surpassed  it  when  he  invented  the  Harp-Lute,  which,  when  at  its  best, 
is  one  of  the  finest  of  invented  forms.  It  was,  however,  by  no  means 
so  at  first,  and  it  will  be  the  writer's  endeavour  to  describe  the  gradual 
improvement  of  this  interesting  instrument  until  it  received  that  ex- 
ceptionally graceful  form  which  makes  it  so  attractive  an  object. 

The  Harp-Lute  is  a  development  of  the  Harp- Lute-Guitar.  Like  it, 
it  had  eleven  strings,^  tuned  to  the  same  notes  and  fingered  in  the 
same  manner.  So  far  they  are  similar  ;  but,  as  already  stated,  the  Harp- 
Lute-Guitar,  when  used  in  conjunction  with  the  Pianoforte,  was  tuned 
a  tone  lower,  its  pitch  being  then  a  seventh  lower  than  its  notation 
indicates,  while  that  of  the  Harp-Lute  was  unaltered  when  played  in 
conjunction  with  that  instrument. 

These  two  instruments  are  singidarly  unlike  in  form.  The  double 
head  of  the  Harp- Lute -Guitai',  unsupported  except  on  one  side — a  faulty 
construction  if  more  than  ordinary  tension  was  brought  to  bear — was 
abandoned,  and  a  harmonic  curve  with  a  scroll  termination,  resembhng 
that  which  may  be  seen  on  the  eighteenth-century  French  Harps,  took 
its  place.  To  support  this  harmonic  curve  a  very  large  and  deep  body 
was  required,  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  left  side  of  which  we  find  a 
pillar  attached,  which  pillar  supports  the  scroll  end  of  the  harmonic 
curve,  while  the  other  end  is  supported  by  a  neck,  with  finger-board 
and  frets  springing  from  the  right  side  of  the  upper  portion  of  the 
body.  On  the  finger-board  are  seven  strings,  there  being  also  four 
open  strings  in  the  bass.  Three  of  these  open  strmgs  are  provided 
with  stops,  by  which  they  can  each  be  shortened  so  as  to 
produce    a    semitone    in    advance    when    a    change    of    key    is 


required.      These  stops    resemble  those  used  for  a  similar  purpose   by 
Cousineau  on  the  French  Pedal- Harp. 

1  The  -writer  has  seen  two  Harp-Lutes  with  eleven  strings.     One  of  these  has  Light's  name  upon  it. 


68  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 

This  is  a  fairly  accurate  description  of  one  of  Light's  early  instru- 
ments, but  as  no  patent  was  obtained  for  it,  Light  undoubtedly  had 
imitators,'  and  it  is  not  unlikely  some  one  of  these  may  have  improved 
upon  the  original  form,  as  a  gradual  development  can  be  traced.  First 
we  find  the  scroll  head  generally  abandoned  for  a  Corinthian  capital, 
an  additional  string  to  be  tuned  C  added  to  the  finger-board,  the  stops 
alluded  to  are  replaced  by  loop  stops,"  the  open  notes  in  the  bass 
increased  in  number,  and  eventually  the  upper  C  string  disappears, 
and  five,  four,  or  three  strings  are  then  left  on  the  finger-board,  while 
an  additional  finger  -  board  with  three  strings '  is  added  to  the 
treble. 

The  Harp-Lute  as  it  now  appears  is  undoubtedly  a  most  beautiful 
instrument.  G.  Packer  of  Bath  added  two  strings,  A  and  B,  to  the  bass, 
which  may  be  seen  on  an  exceptionally  fine  instrument  in  the  Donaldson 
Museum.* 

It  was  C.  Wheatstone  apparently  who  added  tlie  second  finger-board, 
which  made  the  high  C  string  on  the  large  finger-board  unnecessary. 
He  also  added  keys  to  the  F,  and  sometimes  to  the  G  strings,  and  when 
these  were  pressed  by  thumb,  passing  accidentals  could  be  produced,  or 
the  keys  could  be  latched  at  pleasure ;  and  eventually,  when  only  three 
strings  remained  on  the  large  finger-board,  the  B  string  was  also 
furnished  with  one  of  these  keys.  Light  also  made  use  of  a  key  for  the 
F  ^  string.     Packer  also  used  keys,  and  on  the  specimen  before  referred 

'   On    the    30th    December    1S1.">,   when    Light  boaifl,  the  fourth  being  tuned  B,  a  suggestion  of 

advertised     his    instrument    in    the    Caledonian  Mr.  Dowues,  who  will  be  hereafter  mentioned,  to 

Mercury,  he  cautioned  the  readers  to  "  beware  of  facilitate  the  execution  of  some  difEcuH  passages 

counterfeits  offered  at  some  music-shops."  without  descending  to  the  lung  finger-board  for  that 

2  Dr.  Busby  in  1825,  when  describing  it  at  this  note  (Parry's  Tutor,  second  edition,  note,  p.  24). 
stage,  states  it  "  b.as  m  its  latest  imjrroveineiU  The  writer  has  not  seen  one  of  these  instruments, 
twelve  strings."  Yet  we  find  in  Grove's  Diction-  ■"  The  sounding-board  of  this  beautiful  instru- 
ary  the  following  statement :  "  The  Harp-Lute  had  ment  has  no  sound-hole,  probably  to  enable  it  to 
originally  twelve  catgut  strings."  As  before  stated,  withstand  the  tension  of  the  additional  strings, 
they  were  made  with  eleven.  The  specimen  illus-  As  it  could  not  be  removed  from  the  case,  the 
trated  is  not  by  Light,  but  it  has  the  same  following  measurements  must  not  be  accepted 
number  of  strings  upon  the  finger-board  and  .as  strictly  accurate  :  Extreme  length  .ibout  Xi 
arranged  in  the  same  manner  as  on  one  of  Light's,  inches,  breadth  of  sounding-board  about  l.Si 
but  it  has  not  got  the  thumb-key  for  shortening  inches. 

the    F    string,    and   is    longer  and   less   graceful.  •'  A   good   specimen    in   the   South  Kensington 

Light's  instrument  is  finely  formed.  Museum,  No.  (iTT),  has  only  one  key,  and  that  for 

3  Tuned  C,  E,  G,  an  octave  higher  than  those  shortening  the  V  string.  GJ,  which  occurs  in 
on  the  large  finger-board.  Some  instruments  one  of  Light's  duets,  can  be  produced  from  the 
were  made  with  four  strings  on  the  small  finger-  finger-board. 


HARP-LUTE, 

WITH      FOURTEEN       STRINGS 


THE    HAEP-LUTE  69 

to  there  are  an  unusual  number.'  Angelo  Benedetto  Ventura,  a  well- 
known  teacher  who  wrote  for  the  instrument,  invented  an  Imperial 
Harp-Lute,^  and  it  is  possible  there  were  several  other  makers  whose 
names  do  not  appear  upon  the  instruments  made  by  them. 

Light  is  stated  to  have  pubhshed  an  "Introduction  to  the  Art  of 
Playing  on  the  Harp-Lute  and  Apollo  Lyre."  ^  C.  Wheatstone*  published 
an  Instruction  Book  for  his  Regency  Harp-Lute.  This  was  the  work 
of  John  Parry,'  and  ran  through  apparently  three  editions,  from  which 
much  valuable  information  is  to  be  obtained,  and  in  which  are  excellent 
Preludes  in  various  keys  by  Mr.  Downes,  an  accomplished  writer  for 
the  instrument. 

Light's  Harp-Lute,  according  to  Dr.  Busby,  "  though  apparently  in 
the  key  of  C,  was  tuned  to  the  pitch  of  Eb,  or  a  sixth  lower  than  the 
written  notes  :  an  accommodation  provided  in  favour  of  the  voice,"  and 
this  statement  is  verified  by  a  volume  by  Light,  in  which  are  twelve 
airs  arranged  as  duets  for  the  Harp-Lute  and  the  Pianoforte.  In  these, 
when  the  Harp- Lute  music  is  in  C,  that  for  the  Piano  is  in  Eb.  When 
the  Harp-Lute  music  is  in  G,  that  for  the  Piano  is  in  Bb,  and  when 
the  Harp-Lute  music  is  in  F,  that  for  the  Piano  is  in  Ab. 

Those  who  care  to  consult  Dr.  Busby's  long-forgotten  volumes  will 
find  that  when  mentioning  this  and  a  few  other  instruments  he  writes 
solely  about  Light  and  his  inventions :  Light's  imitators  or  improvers 
are  unnoticed.  Again,  if  Grove's  Dictionary  is  consulted.  Busby's  state- 
ment as  to  the  tuning  of  the  Harp -Lute  will  be  found  without 
qualification.  So  the  inquirer  who  consults  the  latter  work  will 
naturally  be  induced  to    believe  all  Harp-Lutes   were  so  tuned;    but 

'   As  originally  constructed  this  instrument  had  p.   247.      The  writer  has  endeavoured  to  trace  a 

kej-s  to  the  B,  G,  and  F  strings,  and  loop  stoiis  to  copy  of  this  work,  but  without  success, 
all  the  other  open  strings.    At  a  subsequent  period  *  Dr.    Busby   mentions   a   person   of   the    same 

keys  were   .attached  to  the  E,   B,  and  A  strings,  name  .as  the  inventor  of  the  Acoucryptophone,  an 

the  loop  stops  being  retained.  Enchanted  Lyre,  exhibited  in    London    in    1822. 

-  Ti   •     3-cti     li.  i     -1     !•<■     ,1  •     ,  ,  Concert  Room  Anecdotes,  vol.  i.  p.  9. 

-  It  is  diincult  to  identify  these  instruments.  -   ,,    ,         x^      ,  ,   . ,  ,  ,         .    ,     „ 

4  tr„„„  I    ).    1     IT-     t             ii,          i     .  -  "rhaps  Bardd  Alaw,  the  author  of  the  Welsh 

A  narp- Lute  by  Ventura  in  the  writer  s  possession  ,,                ,      ^   .               ,      .         ,  . 

i,„      ,       ,          ,   .            rrii       ,   i    ■            i_ Vi     1  ■  narper,  about   twenty  books   of  instructions  for 

has   twelve   strings.     The    1st    is    a  short  strint;  ,■„       \    ■                               , 

;n      t      ii          ,         1   i.1      1    ,    r,    1         1    .,,  different    instruments,    and    a    vast   quantity    of 

without  a  fanger-board,  the  2nd,  .Srd,  and  -tth  are  ,               .         „,           .        ,       ,  ., 

^r,   fi,.>   «„„„..  k       1        Ti                    1  other  music.       Ihe  writer  has  failed  to  hnd  any 

on   tlie   hnger-board.       The    remainder   are   open  ,          ■     ,        ,       ,,         ^          , 

of..:„„o   „ii     f     1  ■  1   1          1          i.           rni      •  piece  of  music  for  the   Harp-Lute   bv   this  com- 

strings,  all  of  which  have  loop  stops.    The  instru-  ■,        ^                       .   !                ' 

„ .  :„  ^c  c      s              7        11   7          i    1  poser ;    but   Downes   certainly   wrote  for  Wheat- 

ment  is  of  nne  form  and  well  decorated.  ,     . 

stone's   instrument,  .and  c<mtributed  to   the    late 

3  British  Musical  Biography, Brown  and  Shatton,       edition  of  the  Instruction  Book. 


70  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

that  is  not  so.  This  assertion  can  only  be  proved  by  reference  to 
music  and  books ;  so,  even  if  the  following  statements  are  found 
tiresome,  the  reader  must  recollect  that  they  are  necessary.  Ventura 
composed  or  arranged  airs,  etc.,  for  the  Harp-Lute  and  for  his  Imperial 
Harp-Lute,  with  accompaniments  for  the  Pianoforte  and  Spanish 
Guitar.  In  those  that  the  writer  has  examined,  the  music  for  the 
Harp-Lute,  with  one  exception,  is  in  the  same  key  or  keys  as  that 
for  the  instruments  which  are  to  accompany  it ;  and  in  the  solitary 
exception,  probably  to  simplify  the  fingering,  the  performer  is  directed 
to  time  the  Harp-Lute  a  tone  higher,  and  so  really  play  in  the  key 
in  which  the  music  for  the  other  instrument  is  written.  Again,  there 
is  in  Parry's  Instruction  Book  nothing  whatever  to  lead  any  one  to 
suppose  that  he,  Wheatstone  for  whom  he  wrote,  or  Downes,  who 
wrote  for  Wheatstone's  instrument,^  accepted  Light's  system  of  tuning. 
In  fact,  so  far  from  doing  so.  Parry's  directions  are  to  "  tune  the  3rd 
string  to  C,  thus  ^,  and  the  2nd  and  1st  to  the  E  and  G  following"  ; 
further,  it  may  be  remarked  that  the  range  of  two  of  the  vocal  pieces 
in  the  second  edition  of  his  Tutor  is  from  C  to  G,  whereas  if  the 
instrument  was  tuned  a  major  sixth  lower  than  the  written  notes,  the 
vocaUst  would  have  to  sing  from  E  in  the  bass  to  B  on  the  stave. 

It  is  more  than  probable  that  Wheatstone  tuned  his  Regency 
Harp-Lute  to  the  written  notes,  and  that  the  performer  sang  the 
music  either  as  it  was  written  or  an  octave  lower,  as  found  most 
suitable  for  the  voice. 

As  already  shown,  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  Wheatstone's 
instrument  was  tuned  to  the  written  notes,  but  whether  or  not  that 
tuning  was  an  octave  lower  is  a  question  that  can  only  be  settled 
by  testing  one  of  his  instruments ;  for,  in  the  Instruction  Book  for  it 
there  is  a  statement  which  is  of  value  as  a  clue,  viz.,  that  the  three 
first  strings,  presumably  those  on  the  large  finger-board,  are  to  be  of 
the  same  thickness  as  the  three  first  strings  on  the  violin  and  the 
others  graduated  downwards.  Consequently  an  instrument  with 
such     strings     tested     with    the     Piano    would     decide     the     matter. 

•  In  Select  Airs,   etc.,    Book   2,  prepared    by  Guitar.    Tlie  vocal  music  and  accompauiments  for 

R.  L.  Downes  for  C.  Wheatstone's  Regency  Harp-  both  the  instruments  are  in  each  case  in  the  same 

Lute,  there  are  four  songs  with  separate  accom-  key. 
paniiiienta  for  the  Harp-Lute  and  fur  the  Spanish 


HARP-    LUTE 

WITH     SIXTEEN     STRINGS 

DONALDSON      MUSEUM 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


71 


Fortunately  one  of  these  instruments^  is  at  present  passing  through 
the  hands  of  Messrs.  Wheatstone  and  Co.,  Conduit  Street,  representa- 
tives of  the  firm  formerly  of  the  Strand,  and  with  their  permission  the 
writer  has  tested  the  instrument,  and  there  appears  to  be  every  reason 
to  suppose  that  Wheatstone's  Harp-Lute  was  tuned  an  octave  lower 
than  the  written  notes,  that  is,  the  3rd  string  on  the  large  finger-board 

should  be  tuned  to  ^. 

The  following  are  the  dimensions  and  length  of  strings  of  a 
fine  specimen  of  Light's  Harp- Lute : — Total  length,  33  in.,  width, 
13f  in. 

There  are  seven  strings  on  the  finger-board.  The  1st  string,  C, 
measures  13f  in.,  and  has  seven  frets ;  the  2nd,  3rd,  4th  and  5th 
measure  14f  in.  ;  the  6th  and  7th  measure  15f ;  the  8th,  to  which  there 
is  a  thumb-key,  measures  22|- ;  the  9th  2B^  ;  the  10th  24^;  the  11th 
25  ;  the  12th  25^.  The  writer  has  not  seen  a  Harp-Lute  by  Light  with 
a  second  finger-board ;  it  is  possible  his  instrument  was  not  made  with 
more  than  one. 

As  a  guide  to  those  who  may  wish  to  string  one  of  these  instru- 
ments, the  following  are  the  measurements  of  the  strings  of  Packer's 
and  Wheatstone's  Harp-Lutes,  and  the  gauge  of  such  strings  as  have 
been  found  suitable  for  Packer's,  Wheatstone's,  and  other  instruments  :  ^ — 


Small  finger-board — 
Packer. 
lOf  in. 

Large  finger-board — 
Packer. 
18f  in. 


Wheatstone. 
10|  in. 

Wheatstone. 
17Ain. 


For  G  gauge  F  1st  Oct. 


ForE 
ForC 

ForG 
ForE 
For  C 


D  2nd  Oct. 
F  2nd  Oct. 


gauge  A  2nd  Oct.^ 


F  2nd  Oct. 
A  3rd  Oct. 


1  The  instrument  was  made  by  T.  Poole,  and 
has  "Wheatstone  inventor  London"  engraved 
upon  it.  There  is  little  difference  between  it  and 
others,  with  the  additional  finger-board  the  writer 
has  seen,  except  that  it  is  flatter  at  the  lower  end 
to  which  four  gilt  balls  .ire  attached,  on  which  it 
can  be  made  to  stand  when  desired.  The  measure- 
ments are  as  follows: — E.xtreme length, 32|  inches; 
length  of  sounding-board,  15|  inches  ;  from  upper 
end   of   sounding-board    to    bridge,    10^    inches  ; 


extreme  width  of  sounding-board,  13|  inches; 
width  of  upper  portion  of  sounding-board,  8  inches. 

-  If  coloured  strings  for  F  and  C  cannot  be 
obtained,  clear  strings  of  the  proper  gauge  can 
be  coloured  by  using  black  and  red  ink,  and, 
when  dry,  olive  oil. 

^  The  1st  string  on  the  violin  gauges  G  1st 
Oct.,  but  when  used  on  the  Harp-Lute  the  tone 
is  thin  and  poor. 


72 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


Packer. 


B/ 

22f  in. 

Ar 

22f  in. 

G, 

23f  in. 

F, 

241  in. 

E, 

24|  in. 

D, 

25|  in. 

c, 

261  in. 

B, 

26|  in. 

A, 

26|  in. 

G, 

27    in. 

OPEN   STRINGS 

Wheatstone. 

2  If  in.      gauge  F  3rd  Oct. 


21|  in. 

„       F  3rd  Oct. 

22^  in. 

E  4th  Oct. 

23^  in. 

E  4th  Oct. 

24f  in. 

D  4th  Oct. 

25-|  in. 

C  4th  Oct.  or  D  4th  Oct. 

25^  in. 

B  4th  Oct.  or  C  4th  Oct. 

None. 

„       B  4th  Oct. 

None. 

A  4th  Oct. 

254  in. 

Silk  and  Silver. 

The  pegs  by  which  the  strings  on  the  large  finger  -  board  are 
tuned  are  upon  the  Harp-Lute  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the 
nuts,  and  unless  the  strings  are  wound  round  the  pegs  close  to  the 
wood,  and  so  properly  strained  over  the  nuts,  the  tone  produced  by 
the  strings  may  be  more  or  less  imperfect.      To  remedy  this,  Packer  of 

Bath  placed  above  each  nut  on  both 
the  large  and  small  finger-boards, 
ivory .  knobs.  Through  holes  in 
these  knobs  the  strings  pass,  and 
are  thereby  drawn  down  above  the 
nuts.  This  excellent  aiTangement 
may  not  be  jjossible  on  some  instru- 
ments, but  a  nut  such  as  is  shown 
by  the  diagram  the  writer  has  con- 
structed, and  found  equally  eflica- 
cious.  This  form  of  nut  had  better 
be  fastened  to  the  upper  portion 
of  the  large  finger-board  by  small  screwnails.  As  may  be  seen,  each 
string  as  it  passes  the  nut  is  grasped  twice,  with  the  result  that  a 
pure  tone  is  produced.  The  strings  should  be  sufficiently  raised  by  the 
nut  so  as  to  prevent  them  from  striking  the  finger-boards  when  pulled 
with  moderate  force. 


(\ 

l\  ^ 

r^^\) 

~ 

M 

■  When  B  ii   on  the  finger-board,  the  string 
ahould  be  A  3rd  Oct. 


-  When   A   is  on   the  finger-board  the  string 
should  be  G  3rd  Oct. 


THE    HARP-LUTE 


73 


t 


Open  Strings. 


*    # 


Scale. 


Strings  on  the  Finger-boari 


2nd 
O     2 


2^ 


,»     -* 

^ 


Strings  on  the  small  Finger-board. 


^ 


MMIIi 


m 


^ 


X 

G 


3=* 


3X12 
F    G    A    B 


1      2 
D    E 


2      3      3      3      3 
F    G    A    B    C 


CDEFGABCD 


+  There  are  A  and  B  strings  upon  some  instruments. 

*  On  some  instruments  the  strings  A  and  B  are  upon  the  finger-board. 


On  many  of  the  instruments,  with  five  or  more  strings  on  the 
finger-board,  a  cavity  may  be  seen  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  strings 
and  above  the  first  fret.  Into  this  cavity  is  inserted  a  stop,  here 
represented,  which,  when  turned,  presses  the  B  string  above  the 
first  fret.  When  the  stop  is  thus  fixed,  the  string  is  BB  ;  but  ^ 
when  the  stop  is  released,  the  string  is  Bb.*  In  Parry's  second  edition 
there  is  a  statement  that  this  stop,  which  was  very  defective,  had  been 
improved,  and  that  it  was  the  opinion  of  many  professors  that  this 
stop  would  be  better  omitted  altogether,  and  when  playing  in  any  key 
requiring  Bb  the  string  should  be  tuned  to  that  note.  As  already 
stated,  a  thumb-key  was  attached  to  the  B  string  when  it  was  removed 
from  the  finger-board. 

A  REPRESENTATION  OF  THE   3  AND 
5  STRINGS  ON  THE  FINGER-BOARD. 


N.B. — The  strings  on  the  short  Finger-board  are 
fingered  the  same  as  the  three  first  strings. 

For   an   instrument    with   three    strings    on   the    finger-board,    and 

1  Busby's  Concert  Room  Anecdotes.     There  is       the  instrument  for  holding  the  stop  when  not  in 
generally  another  cavity  upon   some   portion   of      use. 


74 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


stops  and  keys  to  the  open  bass  strings,  the  following  directions  for  the 
tuning  and  arranging  the  stops  and  keys  will  be  found  sufficient : ' — 

Fix  the  stops  or  keys  for  the  B,  A,  and  E  strings,  then  tune 
the  instrument  to  the  key  of  C,  which  is  the  original  key,  the  strings 
on  the  finger-board  being  tuned  to  C,  E,  and  G,  those  on  the  small 
finger-board,  C,  E,  G  an  octave  higher.  The  ^^^^^^^  i(j(j.jJj| 
open  strmgs  are  tuned  in  octaves  downwards.  ^\x.    \^[^\i-' 


To  play  in  F  release  the  B  stop.^ 


Cadence 


-jMlM 


To  play  in  Bb  release  the  B  and  E  stops. ^       Cadence  ^^^^3^  t 

•J 

To  play  in  Eb  release  the  B,  E,  and  A  stops.     Cadence    ^VUJ  (a  fj  (jt(;  j 


To  return  to  the  original  key  of  C,  fix  the  B,  E,  and  A  stops. 


To  play  in  G  fix  the  F  stop. 


To  play  in  D  fix  the  F  and  C  stops.* 

To    play    in   A  fix  the   F,   C,  and  G 
stops  and  tune  the  lowest  G  to  GJj;.* 

To  play  in  E  fix  the  F,  C,  G,  and  D 
stops  and  tune  the  lowest  G  to  G^.^ 


Cadence 


Cadence  j'»  j  (j(j(ii|j|| 


Cadence 


Cadence 


pSUiiUd 


The    instrument  can  also  be    played  in  the    keys  of  C,   A,   D,   G, 
and  E  minor. 


'  Early  instruments  will  require  to  be  treated 
diflferently.  For  instance,  supposing  the  instru- 
ment to  have  five  strings  on  the  finger-hoard, 
the  fourth  and  fifth,  B  and  A,  will  require  to 
be  lowered  to  Bb  and  Ab  when  either  note  is 
required  and  again  raised  to  Bt]  and  AQ  when 
the  instrument  is  to  be  used  either  in  the  key 
of  C  or  in  any  key  in  which  sharps  occur. 

2  When  playing  one  air  in  F,  arranged  by 
T.  Bolton,  the  performer  is  directed  to  tune  the 
low  G  string  to  A  ;  and  we  find  Downes  directing 
it  to  be  tuned  to  A  or  F  as  required. 


'  Parry's  directions  are  to  tune  the  lowest  C  to 
Bb  when  necessary,  but  in  the  Prelude  by  Downes 
both  C  and  Bb  occur.  Downes  must  have  written 
for  an  instrument  with  sixteen  strings,  or  have 
intended  the  G  string  to  be  tuned  BU. 

■•  Ventura  lowered  the  C  string  to  A.  Downes 
apparently  did  the  same. 

''  Ventura's  directions  are  to  lower  the  C  string 
one-third.     Downes  apparentlj'  did  the  same. 

"  Ventura  lowered  the  C  string  to  A.  Downes 
occasionally  tuned  the  G  string  to  E  and  the  G 
string  to  A. 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


75 


MANNER   OF    PLAYING    UPON    THE  HARP-LUTE 

"  Place  the  instrument  across  the  body  with  the  neck  incHned 
upwards.  The  position  is  more  easily  preserved  by  having  a  ribband 
fixed  to  both  ends  and  slung  over  the  left  shoulder." 

"  The  3  first  strings  are  generally  played  with  the  1st,  2nd,  and 
3rd  fingers,  the  1st  for  the  3rd  or  C  string,  the  2nd  for  the  2nd  or 
E  string,  and  the  3rd  for  the  first  or  G  string ;  sometimes  the  2nd 
and  3rd  are  played  with  the  1st  finger  and  the  1st  string  with  the 
2nd  finger,  and  others  are  struck  with  the  thumb." 

"  The  fingers  of  the  right  hand  must  be  held  light  over  the  strings 
in  an  arched  position,  and  the  thumb  against  either  of  the  bass  strings 
in  a  horizontal  direction  quite  straight.  The  general  situation  for 
striking  the  strings  is  near  the  Star  or  sound  hole.  To  produce  a 
piano  effect  play  nearer  the  finger-board  with  the  fingers  held  in 
rather  a  horizontal  direction,  and  quite  stiff"."  ' 

The  fingering  of  the  bass  or  open  strings  of  the  Harp- Lute  is  precisely 
the  same  as  that  of  the  Pedal-Harp,  x  indicating  the  thumb,  and  1,  2,  3 
the  first,  second,  and  third  fingers ;  but  as  the  longest  strings  are  nearest 
to  the  performer,  the  fingering  is  reversed. 

Chords  should  generally  be  played  in  arpeggio.  The  thumb  and  the 
fingers  grasp  the  strings,  then  by  a  sudden  turn  of  the  wrist  the 
thumb  and  the  three  fingers  are  released  in  succession. 


(The  Chromatic   Scale.) 


Tuned  in   the  Key  of  C. 


C    String. 


E    String. 


^ 


3 


feti 


G  String. 


rrr  FT 


7=^ 


D 


E       F      G      A       B 


0        12        3 

Cl|    C«      Dll    Dtl 


G  Open  String;s 

^   y  1,^   !>f  |ii»   q|» 


0       12 

Ell    '''1    F8 


0       12       12      3     4 

g1}  G«  A|j   A#  bI]  cl;  ctt 


i 


:h 


J2-*. 


Ilfl      ly 


YVV^f 


Lea 


I  Hand. 


2        3        0        13 


1        2 


2        3 


i 


'  Parry's  Instruction  Book. 


76 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Double  Notes. 


i  j  "j  'i 


^Ltft  Mndi  O 


O  fi  O  1 


fe=* 


M 


jaJ      aj       8 


m 


w 


ii    *v     i*      y       xJ     X*     X 


I        5       3       3       i        1 


i  1  5         3  "3         1  I  I 


Ex. 


byJ^s  3 


I      3 


S         3     2     2      I 


Easy  Preludes  in  some  of  the  Keys. 


" .  .'■»-.  ■.■.j;JjiQ%ir-'iJ^^-Ti'fi^j|-pJ 


G. 

A.B.  E  &  F  on. 


*i.B.E.  F  &  C  on.  Zpp-^^ 


A-ft  E    only  on. 
C.  F    a.    B    off. -W 


^.>i ji  jiijj  fif n-iJ"J^r[^ 


E.C. 


vri zi /j  J  j  Jij  J  f  ML^^i^^ 


=#^ 

-g 

q 

i 

* 

T 

une  t 

he 

low 

est  C. 

lo 

B^ 

Si 

H#1^ 

5^3^  =1 

#1 

re 

Z] 

C 

FS 

b; 

L-C5-J 

1 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

t^ 

^ 

u- 

J — ^;±±^ 

i^/i" 

If  the  directions  already  given  are  followed,  it  is  to  be  hoped  any 
possessor  of  one  of  these  instruments,  who  wishes  to  do  so,  may  be 
able  to  string,  tune,  and  play  upon  the  instrument.      The  tone  of  the 


THE       HARP-LUTE 
GRESI      AND     MARIO 


THE    HARP-LUTE  77 

Harp-Lute  will  be  found  to  resemble  that  of  the  Pedal-Harp,'  and 
for  simple  music  or  accompaniments,  when  accidentals  are  not 
required  in  the  bass,  it  must  be  excellent ;  but  even  when  the  Harp- 
Lute  is  furnished  with  movable  keys,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  use 
them  when  the  movement  is  rapid.  Certainly  few  accidentals  below 
C  occur  in  any  of  the  advanced  solo  pieces  the  writer  has  examined. 

Before  concluding  this  notice,  some  reference  should  be  made  to 
the  reproduction  of  a  long-forgotten  photograph  taken  during  the 
palmy  days  of  ItaUan  Opera,  when  Grisi  was  still  great,  that  prince 
of  tenors,  Mario,  in  his  prime,  and  II  Trovatore  the  popular  opera  of 
the  day.  The  costumes  are  those  worn  by  those  great  artists  during 
the  first  act  of  the  opera,  and  Mario  is  supposed  to  be  singing  the 
opening  serenade,  "  Deserto  Sulla  Terra,"  and  accompanying  himself 
upon  a  Harp-Lute.'  The  photograph  is  interesting  as  showing  the 
appreciation  of  an  artist,  who  in  stage  costume,  etc.,  was  so  much 
in  advance  of  his  time,  for  the  beautiful  little  instrument  that  has 
been  described  ;  but  we,  with  our  more  exact  knowledge,  cannot  but 
be  surprised  to  find  a  troubadour  in  a  supposed  fifteenth- century 
costume  playing  upon  an  early  nineteenth-century  instrument  before 
a  Victorian  vUla ;  but,  when  this  photograph  was  taken,  such 
anachronisms  passed  unheeded,  and  the  prettily  conceived  picture 
was  lithographed  for  the  title-page  of  J.  L.  Hatton's  well-known  song, 
"  Come  live  with  me  and  be  my  love,"  one  of  the  few  English  songs 
occasionally  sung  by  Mario. 

The  writer  thinks  it  desirable  to  notice  here  another  of  Edward  Light's 
inventions,  the  "  Harp-Lyre."  Dr.  Busby  states  that  it  differs  from  the 
Harp-Lute  "  only  in  the  shape  of  the  body,  which  is  flat  at  the  back 
and  somewhat  similar  to  that  of  the  Apollo  Lyre."  This  instrument 
is  mentioned  in  the  following  curiously  worded  advertisement  which 
appeared  in  the  Caledonian  Mercury,  30th  December  1815  : — 

"  Musical  Cabinet  for  Portable  Instruments,  the  most  desirable 
ever  before  oflfered  to  the  public  mind  of  superior  judgment  and  taste, 
viz.,   newly  invented    Harp-Lute    and   Harp-Lyre,   which    produce    the 

•   Ventura  asserted   that    his    improved    Harp-  of  this  instrument  is  to  be  attributed  principally  to 

Lute  was   "  equal  to   the   Harp."      Light   stated  its  resemblance  in  point  of  tone  to  the  real  Harp." 

that  his   instrument  had   "  the  same   sound   and  -  The    instrument   is   singularly   like    that    by 

effect  as  real  harps"  ;  Parry,  that  "  the  celebrity  Wheatstone  already  noticed. 


78  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

same  sound  and  eifect  as  the  real  Harp,  although  not  more  than  one- 
quarter  of  the  size,  or  a  tenth  part  of  the  expense.  They  also  accom- 
pany the  voice,  etc.,  as  the  Harp,  are  very  elegant  and  graceful,  and 
incredibly  soon  learnt  to  play  on.  Invented  by  E.  Light,  Musical 
Professor,  sole  Proprietor,  3  Foley  Place,  Cavendish  Square,  London, 
where  the  above  may  be  seen  and  heard,  and  can  only  be  had." 

These  notices  have  enabled  the  writer  to  identify  an  instrument  in 
his  possession,  which  is  very  similar  to  Light's  Harp-Lute.  It  has  seven 
strings  on  the  finger-board,  and  a  thumb-key  or  stop  to  shorten  the  F 
string.  As  it  has  a  stand  it  must  have  been  held  upright  upon  the  lap 
of  the  performer.  The  back,  as  noticed  by  Busby,  is  flat,  and  the  body 
is  more  oval  than  that  of  the  Harp-Lute. 


LIGHTS       HARP-LYRE 


THE    HAKP-LUTE  79 


MUSIC 


It  is  impossible  to  say  what  amount  of  music  was  written  for  the 
Harp-Lute,  but  considering  the  number  of  these  instruments  manu- 
factured by  the  various  makers,  it  must  have  been  considerable. 

Besides  the  Instruction  Book  already  mentioned,  Light  certainly 
produced  a  number  of  volumes.  In  one  of  these,  Book  the  First,  No.  3, 
Vol.  II.,  there  are  six  Divertimentos  and  Airs  with  variations,  also  shorter 
pieces,  composed  and  arranged  by  him.  Another,  No.  3,  Duets  for  the 
Harp-Lute  and  Pianoforte  or  Harp,  has  already  been  referred  to. 

R.  L.  Downes,  a  professor  of  music  at  Cheltenham  and  Bath,  before 
referred  to,  prepared  selected  airs  and  lessons  as  practical  exercises,  with 
four  favourite  Venetian  songs  arranged  for  the  Regency  Harp-Lute,  to 
show  the  brilliant  effect  of  additional  strings,  and  the  application  of 
keys  and  other  improvements,  in  the  keys  of  F,  C,  G,  D,  and  A.  Also, 
Op.  4,  twelve  favourite  songs  adapted  to  popular  national  airs  with  an 
accompaniment  for  the  Harp-Lute,  in  the  keys  of  F,  G,  C,  and  D.  Three 
of  these  songs  are  Irish  Melodies  which  Moore's  words  have  made 
familiar,  but  Moore's  words  being  copyright,  others  had  to  be  supplied. 
The  accompaniments  are  all  full.  Also  a  2nd  Book  of  "Select  Airs  with 
preludes  as  Practical  Lessons  and  4  Favourite  Italian  Songs"  in  the 
keys  of  G,  C,  D,  F,  Etl.     These  were  published  by  C.  Wheatstone  and  Co. 

Angelo  Benedetto  Ventura,  who  taught  the  instrument  to  the 
Princess  Charlotte  of  Wales,  as  ah-eady  stated  invented  the  Imperial 
Harp-Lute.  He  published  twelve  Italian,  French,  and  English 
airettes  arranged  with  an  accompaniment  for  the  Harp-Lute,  in  the 
keys  of  F,  C,  G,  and  A.  The  accompaniments  are  very  full.  On  the 
title-page  of  these  airs  the  following  appears  : — "  N.B. — The  above  songs 
are  adapted  for  his  last  new  improved  Harp-Lute,  superior  to  any 
other  yet  invented,  as  it  is  equal  to  the  Harp." 

He  also  published  the  following  "  Duetto  con  varidazioni  for  the 
Harp-Lute  and  Spanish  Guitar,"  in  the  keys  of  C  and  G.  Thema  with 
six  variations  for  the  Imperial  Harp-Lute,  with  an  accompaniment  for 
the  Pianoforte  or  Spanish  Guitar,  in  the  key  of  C.  A  new  and  elegant 
collection  of  waltzes,  minuets,  and  marches  for  the  Imperial  Harp-Lute, 
with  an  accompaniment  for  the  Spanish  Guitar,  in  the  keys  of  C  and  G. 


80  MUSICAL    INSTEUME NTS 

Besides  the  before-mentioned,  C.  Wheatstone  apparently  published 
twelve  Quadrilles  for  two  Harp-Lutes,  or  for  a  Flute  with  a  Lute 
accompaniment ;  also  a  selection  of  favourite  Airs  arranged  for  the 
Harp-Lute  in  parts. ^ 

Thomas  Bolton,  before  referred  to,  probably  the  musician  of  the 
same  name  who  contributed  to  Parry's  Tutor,  published  a  collection 
of  Lessons,  Songs,  Marches,  and  Dances  for  the  Harp-Lute  or  Lyre. 
These  were  selected  from  his  own  musical  publications  or  adapted  by 
him,  also  three  Italian  Songs  with  accompaniments. 

Bolton  also  arranged  some  of  the  Songs  and  Airs  in  Don  Giovanni, 
together  with  a  number  of  other  melodies  for  the  Harp-Lute  or 
Harp- Guitar.     These  were  published  by  C.  Wheatstone. 

Amongst  "a  collection  of  Airs,  Marches,  Dances,"  etc.,  by  Bolton, 
some  for  the  Lute  are  apparently  intended  for  the  Harp  -  Lute. 
Probably  other  teachers  whose  names  are  now  forgotten  wrote  for  the 
instrument ;  if  so,  and  such  compositions  are  discovered  amongst  collec- 
tions of  old  music,  it  is  to  be  hoped  they  will  be  preserved,  or  forwarded 
to  the  British  Museum  for  preservation. 

Amongst  a  collection  of  music  in  MS.  obligingly  placed  at  the  dis- 
posal of  the  writer  by  Dr.  Kendrick  Pyne  of  Manchester  are  several 
advanced  pieces  for  the  Harp-Lute,  some  by  R.  L.  Downes,  T.  Light, 
R.  Light,  and  others. 

'  The    writer    is     indebted     to    the    Messrs.  Songs,  by  S.  J.  A.  Fitzgerald,  he  will  learn  how 

Wheatstone  for  No.    1   of  this    series.       In   it  Bishop's   well-known    melody    came    to    be    so 

"Home   Sweet  Home"  appears  as  a   "Sicilian  named. 
Air."     IE  the  reader  turns  to  Stories  of  Famous 


H  A  R  P  -  L  U  T  E  80a 


ADDENDA 

The  writer  has  recently  had  the  advantage  of  examining  a  vokime  of 
music  for  the  Harp-Lute,  amongst  which  there  is  "  New  and  Complete 
Instructions,"  by  Edward  Light,  from  which  the  following  has  been 
extracted : — 

THE  MANNER  OF   HOLDING  THE   HARP-LUTE 

"Place  it  in  the  lap,  nearly  perpendicular,  rather  inclining  a  little  backwards,  so  that 
the  performer  can  just  have  a  side-view  of  the  strings ;  the  left  arm  a  little  raised  and 
held  in  a  semicircular  form,  the  point  of  the  thumb  placed  in  the  groove  or  hollow  at  the 
back  of  the  neck,  the  forefinger  a  little  above  the  nut  or  ledge  of  Ivor}',  at  the  top  of 
the  finger-board,  with  all  the  fingers  rather  curved  and  hanging  easy  and  close  as  possible 
to  the  strings,  so  as  not  quite  to  touch  them  ;  the  right  arm  to  be  kept  dow  n,  and  pressed 
gently  against  the  side  of  the  Listrument,  which  serves  not  only  to  keep  it  steady,  but 
likewise  aftords  a  more  commanding  action  of  the  fingers.  The  thumb  of  the  right  hand 
should  generally  be  kept  straight  upwards,  the  fingers  a  little  bent,  and  regularly  inclined 
downwards ;  the  fullest  and  best  tone  is  produced  by  touching  the  strings  about  midway 
between  the  Bridge  and  the  finger-board;  but  in  order  to  produce  the  difierent  effects  of 
Forte  and  Piano,  we  play  higlier  or  lower  at  pleasure."  "  Observe  in  passing  the  thumb ; 
let  it  always  be  above  the  fingers,  never  under." 

This  Tutor  is  a  late  edition,  as  the  thumb-key  for  the  G-string  is 
noticed.  This  key  is  not  found  on  Light's  early  instruments.  As  already 
stated,  Light  tuned  his  instrument  one-sixth  lower  than  the  written 
notes.  He  evidently  treated  it  not  as  a  Guitar,  but  as  a  Harp.  His 
instruction  with  regard  to  the  "slur"  is,  when  two  notes  in  the  treble 
are  to  be  produced  from  the  same  string,  one  from  a  fret  and  the  other 
an  open  note,  the  latter  is  to  be  struck  hrst,  and  without  pulling  the 
string  a  second  time  the  finger  is  to  be  pressed  above  the  fret.  This  is 
the  "slur"  ascending.  For  the  "slur"  descending,  pull  the  string  from 
the  fret  and  then  draw  off  the  finger  and  the  open  note  will  sound.  The 
same  when  three  notes  are  to  be  slurred.  Light  says  this  method  of 
fingering  is  excellent  in  rapid  passages.  In  the  Tutor,  besides  exercises, 
etc.,  in  C,  there  is  music  in  A  minor,  F  major,  D  minor,  G  major,  and 


80& 


MUSICAL     INSTRUMENTS 


E  minor,  and  it  appears  that  he  produced  harmonic  sounds  not  only  from 
open  strings,  but  from  strings  pulled  from  the  frets.  The  following  also 
appears  : — 

"  As  many  imperfect  imitations  of  this  admired  little  instrument  have  crept  abroad 
and  are  imposed  upon  ladies  as  Edward  Light's  real  Harp-Liite,  the  inventor  thinks  it 
here  a  duty  incumbent  on  him  to  declare,  that  all  instruments  manufactured  for  him,  and 
by  his  order,  are  numbered,  and  also  have  his  name  and  address  upon  them,  and  that  no 
others  are  real  Harp-Lutes." 

At  the  end  of  the  Tutor  there  is  a  list  of  music  already  published 
for  the  Harp-Lute  by  Light.  The  following  have  not  been  noticed  in 
the  previous  list  of  music  :— 

Vol.  I. 

No.  1.  The  Tutor,  ....... 

No.  2.  A  Collection  of  Songs,  Airs,  etc.,  for  the  Lute,  with  an  accom- 
paniment for  the  Piano-Forte  or  Harp,         .  .  .4s. 
No.  4.   Collection  of  Songs  with  accompaniments,           .             .  .4s. 
No.  5.  Collection  of  Hymns  and  Psalms,'  etc.,  .             .              .              .4s. 

No.  6.  Collection  of  Songs  with  accompaniments,  .  .  .4s. 


Vol.  II. 


No, 
No, 


L 


Collection  of  Songs  with  accompaniments, 

Collection  of  Italian  Canzonets,  etc.,  for  the  Piano-Forte, 

accompaniments  for  the  Harp-Lute, 
Collection  of  Scotch  and  Irish  Melodies, 

Do.  do.  do.,  2nd  set, 

No.  6.  Italian,  French,  and  English  Ariettcs, 
Preludes  and  Recreations, 


No. 
No. 


with 


4s. 

4s. 
4s. 
4s. 
4s 
6s. 


Vol.  m. 

No.  1.  Favorite  Airs  with  var'",  etc.,  composed  and  adapted  for  the 
Harp-Lute  by  Thomas  Light  of  Bath.  To  be  had  at 
Edward  Light's  place  of  business,  8  Foley  Place. 

ERRATA 

P.  68,  14th  line,  delete  "  which  "  and  insert  "  as  did  also  J.  Royland  ?  of  Sheffield,  as." 
19th  line,  after  "  by  "  insert  "the." 
2.3rd  line,  after  "the"  insert  "Donaldson  Museum." 


'  This  part  is  for  the  Harp-Lute  and  Lyre,  which   instrument  Light  claims  to  have  invented. 
Probably  the  Harp-Lyre  already  noticed. 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


81 


MY  HEART  AND  LUTE. 
WORDS  BY  THOMAS  MOORE.     MELODY  BY  SIR  HENRY  BISHOP. 

TUNE  THE  LOW  CS  STKIXG  TO  Al 


IN  MODERATE  TIME. 


m  '1 3    r 

*- 

►_ 

^ 

-,  -  rJ*  c 

0 

\¥^^ 

r 

F=?ffi 

L-— 

T  ^l:^^ 

0 

§ 

t:^ 

\^IM  ^ 

\,^ 

IpCP^ 

4«^ 

^^ 

W 

^^^^^^^^^^ 


^^^^^^ 


^ 


]t=:!t 


I       give  thee     all  —  I        can     no  more  -Tho'    poor    the      off'  -  nng     be  ; 
Tho'     Love  and  Song  may      fail,      a  -  las !       To     keep  Life's  clouds     a  ■  way, 


My      heart    and     luto      are 
At       least   'twill  make    them 


xh  n  -^^=!=^-^f~1~t~  \  g  ^=i-    i  \  \    \  i  I    ^ 

-3''  'j;  h  h  M ;  r  r  r  i;  r  r  r  i^LLf  i ;  r  r  ^N 

^"|^^Nl^^l,||J     ii^rj  j^i.r  I 


all       the     store   That        I       can      bring      to        thee. 
light  -  er     pass,     Or     guild  thorn       if       they     stay. 


A      lute,  whose      gen  -  tie     song         re  -  veals    The 
If  e    -   ver        Care  bis      dis    -    cord  flings  O'er 


's  lU^iiil  i>U  ^ijL-bi,^^ 


^^^^^^ 


And,       bet   -    ter     far,      a        heart      that  feels  Much  more  than  lute       could 
Let       love      but    gen  -  tly       touch      the  strings, 'Twill     all      be  sweet        a  - 


$ 


^ 


^s*:^ 


i=i 


y  I  give     thee      all—     I  can         no     more—  Tho'       poor     the     ofT'  -  ring     be ;  My 


^1 1^  I J  ^^1 M  ^M;^i^^^ 


V 


I 


fc 


^^^^^^ 


^-^     ad  till.         ls(  tim/!.  2nd  time. 


m 


irrS 


heart      and     lute    are        all         the    store  That     I     can      bring       to        thee.  thee. 

<  -nv  I  \  D.  C. 


^^^^^ 


m^m 


m.f        />- 


T 


m 


82 


MUSICAL   INSTEUMENTS 


PRELUDES  BY  R.  L.  DOWNES. 


THE    HARP-LUTE 

PRELUDES  BY  R.  L.  DOWNES. 


83 


Prelude  shewing  the  effect  of  the  Add!  Strinp. 


S912: 


^^^^^P-^B^i^ 


S4 

10 

HARP 

Lute. 

Piano 
Forte, 

or 

HARP 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 
DUET  BY  EDWARD  LIGHT. 

Se  potesse  un  Suono  egual. 

Andaniino. 


Mozart. 


Andantino.  pri       ^fl  .^_ 


^^ 


»— ► 


fA'^/yA'i'MM\^ 


^  I  ii  J  ij  J 1 .1^ 


aBTOWuBWoBW 


^ 


-O- 


1^1     |1 


-«- 


N9  3. 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


85 


DUET  BY  EDWARD  LIGHT. 


n 


P 


55^: 


^.-^SU^ 


for  nH^^ 


m 


J 


Grt% 


J    1 1'  L'l 


-©- 


s 


'v'TJ'rp  r 


^^ 


^    -/% 


2— r- 


I 


■^ 


^ 


jar  I 


5 


^ 


Ji m. 


"SS. 


m 


9—P 


^6re»    '  >?    1^  dim  /^ 


i 


^ 


i 


^ 


for 


E^i 


If  f  F  f  n  ai 


86 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 

DIVERTIMENTO. 

BT  EDWABD  UOHT. 

PAS  DB  TR0I3  ENTBODUCED  LN  ACHILLE  ET  DEIIXAMia 


MAESTOSO.     X.  (i 


§';^i\iiiiidim^m 


r- 


P 


,aff\j^^\ijii^0 


^ 


-t-^ 


t=« 


i^^.>ifm^,\^,,^^A^h,^u^i^^mn 


[^[^[LJ-[jjl^D^-^^!^dJ'^^l^ 


AIXEOBETTO. 


^^ia;'',.^'i^^tlrii.i^i^^.?^'ir,jr^ii.ii 


-Kr.Sl 


Ju^j^gii^jn^'^rrrriL^'fj^j  ^  ^i 


!f  j/^ffl[^r[Iiii^^^^^grf^%^ 


THE    HARP-LUTE 


87 


DIVERTIMENTO. 
BY  EDWAKD  UOHT. 


TEMPO  Dl  MINDETTO. 


1^.4: 


^z4 


jrI]i|iJi-.iirftjmr^%WiM^^iM 


iS 


Q^jWri^u'uiE'ir  iiiSiuLp' 


j.f,^''uifnij/^i^rfirjjifij  J  11 


Ta/r.Szmfi: 


^iiif[c[r^;fjiLajj^'%i[tLfO^'dli'^i^ 


■.6{,iijT]/irnrpifp.fp 


!^t 


^.   T^ 


jCTCTigfTi^ 


^jj'Lti'UJiL^^ 


* — r 


^'t^^^riQj-Lji6jL;i[j^iJ^,^ifIl'iT^-^ 


88 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


DIVEETIMENTO. 
BT  ESWAILD  UOHT. 


A  L*  POLLACJl 


y^.7 . 


1  .,  ii  r  r^  r  r  r  I  r  n  r  r  f  I  r  n  r  r 


d^;T^.i7  J^^^f^T^:^  iilEi  II- 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


89 


KOBIN   ADAIR. 
THE  INTRODUCTION  AND  SYMPHONY  BY  JOHN  PARRY.    THE  ACCOMPANIMENT  BY  ANQELO  B.  VENTURA. 


^^^^^^^ 


m 


* 


^ftfe^#A^^tfF^£?=%f 


idi=F=mi=^ 


^ 


m 


Wbnt's    this      dull      Town        to      me,       Ro  bin's        not  near?  What  waa't    I  wiab'd  to        see, 


m^^m 


^i^7^ 


^ 


What  made  th'  Assembly  shine  1 
Kobin  Adair. 

What  made  the  Ball  so  final 

Robin  Adair. 

What,  when  the  Play  was  o'er, 

What  made  my  heart  so  soro  t 

Oh!  it  was  parting  with 

Bobin  Adair. 


But,  tho'  thoa'rt  cold  to  me, 
Kobin  Adair. 

I  '11  still  be  true  to  theo, 

Robia  Adair. 

For  him  I  lov'd  bo  well 

Still  in  my  heart  shall  dwell; 

Oh .'  I  shall  ne'er  forget 

Bobin  Adair. 


M 


90 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


All     mVS     DRR.fl     J  E    //!"  cf  M  A  .V .  arrakged  by  r.  l.  downes. 


Andantino 


^£^^=ff;ff^  I  ii  j  I  j  j  I  j-i^ 


it5#ife^^gff 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


91 


AH'.VOUS  DIRAI-JE,  MAMAN  1 


92 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


DESERTO  SULLA  TERRA.        IL  TROVATORE.    VERDI. 


THE  ACCOMPANIMENT  CAN  BK  PLAYED  UPON  A  HARP  LDTE  IF  THE  F  STRING  HAS  A  MOVEABLE  KEY. 
TUNK  TIIK    B   STRING    TO    u!?,  AND  THE   L.\ST  STRING   TO   A. 


De   -   -  »9r   -   to        Bul 
Ma         s'oi     quel      cor 


la     ^er 
pos  -  sie 


if^"t   "t't  '   I't't 


de 


col 
bel 


no      de 
-       -     lo 


DO     m 
ca  -  sU 


3± 


^^^ 


0  WHEN   THB    B   SIRING    IS   OFF  TBI  nKQER-BOARD,    IN    PLACE   OF   D    PLAY    K. 


AH  I  CHE  LA  MORTE.  IL  TKOVATORK     VERUI. 


WHEN   THR   INSTRnMKNT  HAS    FOURTEKN   STRINGS   TUNK  TlIK   LAST   STIIINO    TO   A. 
AND    IN    PLACE  OF  THE   LOW    B    PLAY    D.@ 


(5)T11E  ACCOMPANIMENT    MAY    BE    PLAVED   IN   THE    KEY    OF  0,   WHEN   THE   B   STRING    18    IIPON 
THE    FINOER-BOABD,  THE   LAST  STRINO   BEING   TCNED  TO   B. 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


93 


^ 


^ 


P 


-  tar  ■   da    ncl  vC- 

mor    cbe    po  ei  in 


n  fH  tn  fnifninfCi  ..ci 


m 


^ 


'n-^i'h^ 


chi  de     -    si 

ti  scor    -  Jar, 


a      chi    lie      si  -  -  a      mor- 
non      ti    scor  -  dur  di 


ad  -  dio  Leo  -  no     -     -     ra,  ad   di 
raad  -  dio,  *      Leo-no-ra  ad    -    di     -  o  ad      di 


j^'  J  n  ift-jjg^.o-+^^n  J  n-^ 


Isr  TlilE.     'C  2^0  TIME. 


■s 


\/  \^  I  ^    ^ 


Scon  -  to       cul       san 


gue 


i^  J  n  .11:  J  n  ;n  J  n.^^ 


(^ 


^ 


?^^ 


1^ 


#»     » 


I'a  ■  mor  che     po    -     -       si  in      te ! 


^r^  ^ 


Non    ti     scor-dar 


con     ti     scoT-dar     di 


fy  ]■  n  J- n  ^xxjO.  |j>  rij^n  jO^^ 


rT^T=^ 


^ 


m 


f 


^ 


me,  ad  ■  dio  Leo  -  no     -     ra,  ad    ■    di 


^H-J-jO  :||  ^^ 


Leo     -     no  -    ra  ad       -     -     di 

1     f    ,f 


^ 


■'/^\'      I" 


B 


94 


MUSICAL    I  N  S  T  K  U  M  E  X  T  S 


Z,  I  E  B  K  R       c4V  GVI^T:  fC E 


AREAKGED  BV  R.  L   DOWNES. 

a  la  NV'allz. 


Moderato 


^^^M%>i?^'Ui'Lffi'k}'7.i'i" 


Var:  3. 


m 


^^^^^^^^ff^ 


THE    HAEP-LUTE 


95 


LIEBE  AUGUSTINE. 


P 


f^-*^ 


^ 


-V-TT^-T-^ 


^n«  N    r  "       s,  ."^^  I      J     -|t-g     I   r''  (i^^  f'^'  I   fi"">  .""v  ^"^v  j 


J" 


96 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


DIVERTIMENTO. 

To    thow    the    Compass   and  Power  of   llu     IMPROVD    LUTE. 


IIV  .IDHN  rAUllV. 


MODERATO. 


^Wr'^irrfpi 


alto    — 


d-      a 


m 


~5~zi: 


^ 


Fjr-a-Tf  "f  f  H^ 


t 


f^=^ 


JL^ ft 


m 


a 


»  # 


loco 


Tr 


1       I    n    gbi. 


IZZZSi 


T 


XT 


in 


in 


rrrm^m-^ 


€ — c^—g 


m 


m 


m^^sB^FJ^ 


IC 


^^ 


^^^^^ 


^g^^gte^^i^ji^ig 


1 


RITISH        LUTE-HARP        N»84 
AFTERWARDS      KNOWN      AS 
DITAL   -   HARP 


THE    BRITISH-LUTE-HAEP 

AFTERWARDS    KNOWN    AS   THE    DITAL-HARP 

Edward  Light,  the  inventor  of  this  instrument,  by  fii'st  naming  it 
the  British-Lute- Harp,  and  afterwards,  without  explanation  or  excuse, 
changing  that  name  to  Dital-Harp,  if  he  did  not  confuse  those  of 
his  own  time,  has  left  a  puzzle  to  posterity.  So  it  may  perhaps  be 
better  to  state  plainly  and  at  once  that  the  term  Dital-Harp  can  be 
applied  to  a  British-Lute- Hai'p  with  either  seventeen  or  eighteen  strings, 
but  the  term  British-Lute-Harp  cannot  be  applied  to  a  Dital-Harp  which 
has  nineteen  strings. 

Light,  who  had  for  a  considerable  time  been  engaged  in  endeavouring 
to  perfect  his  Harp-Lute,  obtained  a  patent  upon  the  18th  June  1816 
for  certain  mechanisms  which  he  proposed  to  apply  to  that  instrument. 
By  these  mechanisms  the  strings  were  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened, 
so  as  to  enable  the  performer  to  produce  a  semitone  lower  or  in 
advance  on  any  one  at  pleasure.  Four  distinct  mechanisms  were 
patented :  three  of  these  were  intended  to  draw  the  strings  from 
nuts  to  frets,  the  fourth  to  raise  the  string  above  the  nut,  so  that 
the  string,  when  raised,  would  sound  a  semitone  lower  than  when 
on  the  nut. 

The  proposed  instrument  in  form  somewhat  resembled  Light's  Harp- 
Lute,  which  perhaps  had  not  arrived  at  its  latest  development,  and  the 
additional  C  string  in  the  treble  had  not  then  been  placed  upon  the  finger- 
board. Light  filled  up  the  gap  which  occurs  on  the  Harp-Lute  in  the  bass 
by  adding  A  and  B  strings.  He  also  added  two  additional  bass  strings 
E  and  F.  He  now  had  an  instrument  ranging  from  E  to  C  without 
a  gap.  The  C,  E,  and  G  strings,  as  on  the  Harp-Lute,  were  on  a 
finger-board,  but  it  is  clear  his  intention  was  to  tune  his  new  instrument, 
not  like  the  Harp-Lute  in  C,  but  as  the  Single  Action  Harp  in  Eb. 
So,    to    overcome   the    difficulty    presented    by   the    EH    on    the  finger- 

N 


98  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 

board,  he  attached  above  the  nut  from  which  that  string  was  stretched 
one  of  the  small  mechanisms  for  which  he  obtained  a  patent/  which, 
when  pressed,  raised  the  E  string  off  the  nut,  the  string  being  then  El'. 

The  mechanisms  for  which  he  obtained  the  patent  Light  called 
Ditals  or  Thumb-keys,  and  to  every  string,  with  the  exception  of  C 
and  G  in  tlie  treble,  these  Ditals  or  Thumb-keys  were  to  be  applied. 
Those  to  be  apphed  to  the  strings  from  B  to  B  were  to  be  of  the 
same  form,  but  on  the  four  lowest  bass  strings  different  Ditals  oi- 
Thumb-keys  were  to  act.  In  the  illustration  supplied  with  the 
specification  only  one  appears,  but  it  was  his  intention,  as  he  states, 
to  apply  them  to  all  the  four  strings.  The  instrument  was  intended 
to  rest  upon  the  lap  of  the  performer  ;  so,  to  the  lower  portion  of  the 
body,  a  stand  was  attached.  As  it  had  a  finger-board  like  the  Harp- 
Lute,  it  was  to  be  played  upon  with  the  right  liand  like  that  instrument, 
the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  being  engaged  in  pressing  the  strings  to 
the  frets  when  necessary,  while  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  when 
required,  pressed  the  Ditals.  These  Ditals  were  not  intended  to  be 
pressed  except  by  the  thumb,  and  were  consequently  called  Thumb- 
keys.  They  were  fixed  stops  at  pleasure,  but  when  required  they 
could  be  released.  The  eyes  through  which  the  strings  passed,  and  by 
which  they  were  to  be  pulled  down  to  the  frets,  were  made  sufficiently 
broad  at  the  top  to  enable  the  performer  to  press  such  of  them  as 
were  within  reach  and  so  produce  passing  accidentals,  that  is,  if  it 
was  found  more  convenient  to  produce  an  accidental  by  that  means 
than  by  the  ordinary  method  of  pressing  a  Dital  by  the  thumb.  This 
is  a  brief  description  of  the  instrument,  one  of  which  was  constructed, 
and  which  is  represented  in  the  reproduction  in  outline  of  the  coloured 
drawing  lodged  with  the  specification. 

This  instrument  Light  called  the  British-Lute-Harp ;  but  Avlien 
it  was  before  him  he  must  have  seen  that  with  slight  alterations 
it  would  become  a  small  harp,  and  could  be  played  upon  with  both 
hands — the  bass  with  the  left  and  the  treble  with  the  right.  He 
consequently  removed  the  stop  from  the  E  string  and  added  D,  F,  and 
A  strings  to  the  treble,  ])lacing  one  or  two  of  the  highest  strings  on 
a   finger-board   with   frets.      The  sham   harmonic   curve,   which   may  be 

'   Figures  8  and  9  on  the  diagram. 


I 


<0 

o 


JJJX 


CO  Q 
■  S: 

=  u 

9   X 

2'— 


THE    BEITISH-LUTE-HAEP  99 

seen  in  the  illustration,  received  additional  support,  which  enabled 
Light  to  attach  a  Dital  stop,  similar  to  the  others  in  use,  to  the 
A  string  in  the  bass.  The  Ditals  or  Thumb-keys,  which  he  had 
proposed  to  attach  to  the  lowest  bass  strings,  were  abandoned,  and 
replaced  by  three  loop  stops  similar  to  those  in  use  on  the  Harp- 
Lute.  It  not  being  possible  to  attach  Ditals  to  the  strings  in  the 
treble  above  C,  these  strings,  when  a  change  of  key  became  necessary, 
were  to  be  lifted  from  the  nuts,  from  which  they  were  stretched,  and 
placed  in  notches  on  the  frets  below  the  nuts.  The  manner  of  playing 
upon  the  instrument  being  now  changed  from  that  originally  intended, 
and  the  left  hand,  except  on  rare  occasions,  being  required  to  play 
the  bass,  the  first  finger  bent  was  hereafter  to  be  used  for  pressing 
the  Ditals.  The  term  Thumb-key,  which  occurs  in  the  specifica- 
tion, now  a  misnomer,  was  discontinued,  and  Dital  stop  took  its 
place. 

It  is  impossible  to  say  how  many  of  these  instruments  were  made. 
The  specimen.  No.  4,  in  the  South  Kensington  Museum,  illustrated  in 
Grove's  Dictionary  under  the  title  Dital-Harp,  is  one,'  and  it  may  be 
remarked  that  the  instrument  referred  to  has  no  stand,  but  has  a 
button  at  the  lower  end  to  which  a  ribbon  was  to  be  attached.  It 
is  possible  this  instrument  may  have  been  specially  made  to  suit  some 
pupil  or  performer  on  the  Harp-Lute  ;  certainly  the  A  string  in  the 
treble  which  is  on  it  was  shortly  after  abandoned,  and  we  next  find 
the  instrument  with  seventeen  strings  and  with  a  stand. 

A  New  and  Complete  Directory  to  the  Art  of  Playing  on  the 
Patent  British -Lute-Harp  was  prepared  by  Edward  Light,  a  copy  of 
which  may  be  seen  in  the  British  Museum.^  In  the  catalogue  of  the 
Library  the  date  is  given  as  1817,  on  what  authority  is  not  stated, 
but  in  the  work  the  pupil  is  referred  to  an  engraving,  to  show  the 
manner  of  holding  the  instrument  and  the  position  of  the  fingers  ;  so 
presumably  the  engraving,^  which  represents  a  lady  in  the  act  of 
playing  upon  the  instrument,  was  issued  along  with  the  Directory. 
This  engraving,    which  is    stated   tu    represent    the  British-Lute-Harp, 

1  The    writer    has    seen   an    instrument   with       for  an  instrument  with  seventeen  strings, 
eighteeu  strings,  No.  99.  -^  This  is  aquatint  and  line,   liy  J.  Minasi  and 

2  It  is   evident  that  this  Tutor   was   [.repared       Stadler,  from  a  drawing  by  Buruey. 


100  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 

was  published,  as  the  Act  directs,  February  1,  1819.  In  this  Directory 
a  number  of  pieces  of  music  akeady  prepared  for  the  instrument  are 
advertised. 


THE    DITAL    HARP 

Light  afterwards  added  two  additional  strings,  A  and  B,  to  the  treble, 
the  loop  stops  to  the  thi-ee  bass  strings  were  abandoned,  and  these 
strings  were  furnished  with  Dital  stops,  and  the  name  of  the  instrument 
changed  fi'om  British-Lute-Harp  to  Dital-Harp.  A  new  Directory  had 
now  to  be  prepared.  The  engraved  title-page  of  the  original  Directoiy 
was  retained,  the  name  of  the  instrument  being  altered.  The  engraving 
of  the  lady  playing  the  instrument  was  again  issued — this  time  with 
the  title  Dital-Harp — and  a  new  Preface  and  other  letterpress  engraved. 
Most  of  the  plates  of  exercises  and  music  were  retained,  but  altered 
when  necessary,  that  is,  up  to  page  20,  after  which  page  entirely  new 
music  was  printed.  This  new  Directory,  which  is  stated  to  be  the 
second  edition,  is  dated  November  1,  1819.  Li  it  all  the  music 
formerly  issued  for  the  British-Lute-Harp  was  again  advertised  as  for 
the  Dital-Harp,  and  additional  music  for  the  new  instrument  also 
appears  in  the  advertisement.  This  list  was  afterwards  added  to  as 
new  music  was  issued.  Eventually  the  Directory  was  offered  to  the 
public  without  the  engraving  (the  plate  pei'haps  being  worn  out  or 
the  costume  considered  antiquated),  also  without  date  or  list  of  music. 

The  instrument  in  point  of  form  was  at  its  best  before  it  received 
the  two  additional  strings  and  its  new  name  (see  No.  84  illustrated). 
After  that  the  body  was  increased  in  size ;  the  number  of  strings  to 
be  used  for  the  bass,  which  was  originally  nine,  was  increased  to 
ten  (see  No.  160),  and  eventually  to  eleven.  The  spacing  of  the 
strings  was  also  increased,  the  sham  harmonic  curve  abandoned,  and  a 
much  heavier'  and  more  rigid  instrument,  occasionally  without  sound-hole 

'  On  account  of  the  weight,  these  late  iustru-  portion  of  the  stand  there  is  usually  a  wooden 

ments  are  steady  on  the  lap.     The  chief  diflSculty  support.      Attach  to   each  side  of   this  support 

in  playing  some  pieces  on  the  early  instruments  pieces   of  sheLt-lcad,    and   the   additional   weight 

is  want  of    steadiness,    but   the   weight    may   be  will    probably    helji   to    steady    the    instrument, 

somewhat    increiisud    in    the   following    manner :  The  stand    is    not    intended    to    be    used   except 

Remove   the    screwnails    by   which  the    stand  is  when  on  the  lap.     The  instrument  is  likely  to  be 

attached  to  the  instrument.      Across  the  hollow  biokeu  if  placed  stauding  and  allowed  to  fall  over. 


Jj7awn  by  Bvnn'il 


Eiuiravcti  hy  l.yiiinisi  A  StAdler.         4 


NT  DITAL-HAMI- 


J 


^ 


a 


-) 


"r. 


^7^?je<r/..//'^/  /'//  (  ^/'ur.  l__X/y///"^^ 


/f' 


THE    DITAL-HARP  101 

in  front,  with  diminished  vibration  and  tone  in  the  treble,  was  con- 
structed, of  which  No.  305  is  a  specimen.  The  early,  and,  indeed,  most 
of  the  instruments  made  before  the  false  harmonic  curve  was  abandoned 
are  full  and  sweet,  the  tone  much  resembling  that  of  the  Pedal-Harp. 

Dr.  Busby,  in  his  Concert  Room  Anecdotes,  published  in  1825, 
writes  as  follows:  "The  Dital-Harp,  also  devised  by  E.  Light,  and 
so  called  from  the  Italian  word  dita,  finger  (the  action  or  machinery 
by  which  the  semitones  are  effected  being  pressed  by  the  finger  instead 
of  the  foot),  though  not  unlike  the  Harp-Lute  in  form,  is  totally 
different  in  the  arrangement  of  its  strings,  in  the  method  of  performing 
on  it,  and  in  its  general  effect.  This  instrument  is  strong  in  tone, 
tuned  precisely  as  is  the  Pedal-Harp,^  and  is  also  played  upon  with 
both  hands,  the  only  difference  being  that  in  the  way  it  is  held  the 
order  of  the  strings  is  inverted,  the  longest  or  bass  strings  being 
nearest  to  the  performer — a  convenience  effected  by  a  simple  httle 
machine  attached  to  each  string,  for  which  the  inventor  obtained 
a  patent." " 

"  The  Dital-Harp  may  be  played  on  in  all  the  usual  Harp  keys,  and 
every  semitone  may  be  expressed  at  pleasure.  Its  compass  has  the 
extent  of  three  octaves — that  is,  from  Eb  below  the  bass  clef  to 
Eb  in  alt.  Its  tone  is  of  a  dulcet  quality,  and  unquestionably, 
the  Pedal-Harp  excepted,  this  instrument  is  the  most  eligible  ac- 
companiment to  the  human  voice." 

This  appreciative  paragraph  by  a  cultured  musician  who  had  ample 
opportunity  of  hearing  the  Dital  -  Harp  when  performers  on  the 
instrument  were  numerous,  may  perhaps  induce  some  of  the  possessors 
of  these  instruments  to  attempt '  to  play  upon  them ;  and  it  is  the 
object  of  the  writer  to  make  this  not  only  possible,  but  simple.  But 
before  proceeding  to  that  portion  of  the  chapter,  it  is  necessary  to 
refer  to  a  statement  by  Dr.  Busby  to  the  following-  effect :  "  The 
Dital-Harp  may  be  played  on  in  all  the  usual  Harp  keys,  and  every 
semitone  may  be  expressed  at  pleasure."  This  is  no  doubt  what 
Light  intended ;  but  Light,  a  busy  man,  must  have  depended  upon 
certain  instrument-makers,  and  so  defects  crept  in  of  which  probably 
Light  was  unaware.      For  example,  on  No.    160  illustrated,  E3  cannot 

'   Tlia,t  is,  to  the  written  notes.  ^  This  ia  correctly  reproduced. 


102  MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 

be  expressed  in  the  keys  of  Gtl  and  Dt;  ;  FH  and  Gfl  cannot  be 
expressed  in  the  key  of  AtJ ;  and  Dtl,  Ft],  and  GC|  cannot  be  expressed 
in  the  key  of  Eg.  A  performer  may  use  a  Dital-Harp  for  years 
without  requiring  any  one  of  the  missing  notes,  but  if  the  reader 
examines  the  accompanying  diagram'  of  the  frets,  he  will  see  how  in 
some  cases  the  missing  notes  may  be  supplied ;  for  on  this  diagram  an 
additional  finger-board — which  is  shaded — the  writer  has  lately  added, 
and  upon  this  additional  finger-board  the  three  missing  notes  can  be  pro- 
duced. It  may  be  of  interest  here  to  state  that  the  range  of  the 
instrument  can  be  increased  to  four  octaves  by  constructing  a  small 
finger-board  such  as  represented  on  the  diagram,  which  finger-board 
can,  when  required,  be  made  to  grasp  the  sides  of  the  permanent 
finger-board,  and  so  remain  in  position  as  long  as  desired. 

It  was  not  necessary  for  Dr.  Busby  to  notice  the  defects  in  the 
instrument,  even  if  he  was  aware  of  them,  but  it  is  the  writer's 
duty  to  do  so ;  for,  with  all  its  elegance  of  form  and  delightful 
quaUty  of  tone,  the  Dital-Harp  is  by  no  means  perfect.  For  instance, 
only  one  accidental  can  be  produced  at  a  time ;  that  is,  if  AH  is  required 
throughout,  as  on  the  Pedal-Harp,  two  Dital  stops  must  be  fixed  for  the 
bass  strings,  and  one  treble  string  removed  from  the  nut  to  the  fret. 
To  produce  even  a  passing  accidental,  the  left  hand  must  drop  the  bass 
to  press  a  Dital  stop  or  press  a  string  to  a  fret  in  the  treble.  To 
change  the  key  the  strings  must  be  rearranged,  and,  as  this  takes 
time,  a  sudden  change  of  key  is  as  a  rule  impossible.  Still,  with  all 
its  defects,  the  Dital-Harp  is  a  charming  instrument,  and  must  be  a 
delightful  accompaniment  for  the  voice,  and  within  its  own  limits  is 
both  in  form  and  tone  vastly  superior  to  the  Spanish  Guitar. 

MECHANISM 

The  mechanism  of  the  Dital-Harp  consists  of  a  series  of  levers 
ranging  from  one  inch  and  thiee-quarters  to  four  inches  and  three- 
eighths  in  length.  These  levers  are  supported  at  their  centres  by 
perpendicular  supports  of  steel,  each  of  which,  along  with  the  spring 
which  keeps  thii  lever  in  position,  is  fastened  at  the  lower  extremity  to 
a  large    brass    plate,  about    one-tenth   of  an    inch  in  thickness,  which 

'   TUe  dotted  lines  show  the  Htriugs  when  they  are  removed  from  the  uuts  to  the  frets. 


DITAL-riARP      N°I6  0 


THE    DITAL-HAEP 


103 


ttihg  Itb 


104 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


sustains  the  whole  of  the  mechanism.  This  brass  plate  is  simk  in  a 
cavity  at  the  back  of  the  instrument,  and  there  secured  by  numerous 
screws,  the  whole  being  enclosed  by  a  piece  of  painted  wood  fastened 
to  the  instrument  by  screw-nails 

A  Dital  stop  may  be  said  to  consist  of  a  knob  (to  be  pressed  by  the 
finger),  which  knob  is  at  one  end  of  a  steel  rod  attached  to  one  end  of 
the  lever.  At  the  other  extremity  of  the  rod  there  is  a  notch. 
The  lower  portion  where  this  notch  occurs  passes  through  a 
circular  hole  in  the  brass  plate,  to  which  on  the  under  or  lower 
sg^  'm.  side  a  small  piece  of  steel  like  a  tooth  is  attached.  When 
a  Dital  is  pressed  by  the  finger  and  it  is  requii'ed  to  be  fixed,  it  is 
pulled  downwards,  and  then  the  notch  at  the  end  of  the  rod  becomes 
fastened  as  it  were  to  the  tooth,  the  pressure  of  the  spring,  and  also 
of  the  string  a\  hich  is  drawn  back,  keeping  it  in  its  place.  The  Dital 
is  released  by  a  slight  upward  push. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  notch  and  its  corresponding  tooth  must 
eventually  wear  away,  and  when  in  that  state  a  slight  and  accidental 
touch  may  release  the  Dital  and  cause  inconvenience.  Of  coui'se,  if 
an  instrument  is  so  much  worn  that  the  stops  will  not  remain  fixed, 
the  whole  of  the  mechanism  will  have  to  be  removed  and  a  new  and 
larger  tooth  made  to  replace  the  one  worn  away,  the  notch  in  the  rod 
being  also  renewed. 


DITAL  FIXED. 


DITAL  RELEASED. 


At  the  opposite  end  of  the  lever  a  small  rod  is  attached,  which 
has  a  slight  ledge  sufiicient  to  hold  in  its  place  a  leather  washer  or 
buffer,  which  buffer,  when  a  Dital  is  released,  rests  against  the  brass 
plate  through  which  the  remaining  portion  of  the  rod  passes.     At  the 


r 


DITAL-HARP      N°30  5. 


THE    DITAL-HAEP  105 

end  of  this  rod  there  is  a  screw  to  which  the  brass  eyehole  is  secured. 
The  harp  string  passes  through  the  eyehole,  and  by  it  the  string  is 
drawn  back  when  required. 

The   diagram  already  given    shows  the  position  and  action   of  the 
springs  supplied  to  the  smaller 


levers.      The  longer  levers  are  J- — t>^^is 


supplied  with  a  totally  different  ^^ 
form  of  spring  here  represented.  "^^"^ 


To  remove  the  mechanism,  unscrew  all  the  eyeholes/  unscrew  all 
the  Dital  knobs  (these  last  are  usually  numbered),  unscrew  the  wooden 
plate  at  the  back.  Take  out  all  the  screws  by  which  the  brass  plate 
is  fastened  to  the  instrument.  If  it  is  required  to  remove  any  of  the 
levers  from  the  brass  plate,  they  must  all  be  removed  (down  to  the 
one  the  removal  of  which  is  desired)  in  the  following  manner,  com- 
mencing with  the  longest.  First  unscrew  the  pin  in  the  centre  of 
the  lever,  then  insert  a  piece  of  string  under  the  spring,  raise  the 
spring  and  push  forward  the  lever  until  it  can  be  removed.  Remove 
the  four  followino-  levers  in  the  same  manner.  To  remove  the  eisfht 
shorter  levers,  fix  the  stop  and  press  the  other  end  of  the  lever  w^iile 
unscrewing  the  pin.  The  above  directions  must  be  attended  to  while 
replacing  the  levers.  Almost  all  the  parts  of  the  mechanism  are 
numbered,  the  five  long  levers  by  dots,  and  the  eight  short  levers  by 
numerals. 

The  jarring  sound  which  sometimes  occurs  when  the  string  is  struck 
from  the  nxd,  may  arise  from  the  groove  in  the  nut  being  too  wide, 
the  nut  not  being  high  enough,  the  string  not  passing  directly  through 
the  eye,  or  the  string  not  being  suflficiently  strained  over  the  nut. 

If  the  jarring  sound  occurs  when  the  string  is  stretched  from  the 
fret,  it  shows  that  the  Dital  does  not  draw  the  string  down  sufiiciently 
above  the  fret,  or  that  the  fret  is  too  low. 

To  make  an  instrument  which  is  largely  defective  correct,  the 
mechanism  must  be  removed  as  before  directed,  and  it  is  perhaps  as 
well  to  make  new  nuts  and  frets  throughout.     The  old  frets  had  better 


'& 


'  Those  for  the  lower  bass  strings  have  generally  removed,  tied  to  a  string,  the  others  aildeil  iu 
enlarged  eyeholes  ;  consequently  the  eyehole  lie-  succession,  and  eventually  replaced  in  their 
longing  to  the  lowest  bass  string  should  be  tirst       order. 

O 


106  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

be  removed  by  carefully  sawing  lengthways  through  the  centre  of 
each  fret  with  a  very  fine  saw  and  water,  afterwards  melting  the 
glue  by  applying  hot  water.  The  glue  and  pieces  of  ivory  should  be 
removed  and  the  grooves  cleaned.  Pieces  of  ivory  filed  down  to  the 
proper  thickness,  each  to  fit  a  particular  groove,  must  then  be  prepared. 
These  pieces  of  ivory  must  be  of  greater  height  and   length  than  the 

frets  they  are  to  replace.  Looking  at  the  upper 
side  of  one  of  these  pieces  of  ivory  when  placed  in 
the  groove,  it  will  take  this  form,  the  dotted  line 
indicating  the  probable  depth  the  ivory  will  be  sunk  in  the  wood,  that 
is  as  if  a  sharp  pencil  were  drawn  along  it  when  in  position.  Now 
find  where  the  string  when  stretched  crosses  the  ivory,  and  mark  with 
a  sharp  pencil  on  the  ivory  on  either  side  of  the  string.  Between 
these  marks  make  a  perpendicular  cut  downwards  with  the  fine  saw, 
but  not  too  far.  Gradually  open  this  with  a  file,  knife,  and  sandpaper 
so  as  to  exactly  fit  the  string,  which  must  be  of  the  proper  thickness, 
until,  when  in  position,  the  string,  when  tuned  to  the  proper  note,  will 
ring  clear,  the  string  being  as  near  the  upper  portion  of  the  eye  as 
possible.     The  lower  portion  of  the  notch  for  the  string  had  better  be 

cone-shaped.  Now  find  where  the  string  for  which 
the  continuation  of  the  ivory  is  to  form  a  fret 
crosses  it,  and  with  a  file  remove  a  portion  of  the 
ivory,  which  will  then  present  this  appearance;  trim  it  roughly  with  a 
file,  but  not  too  close. 

If  all  the  nuts  and  frets  are  to  be  renewed,  it  is  better  to  commence 
with  the  lowest  bass  note,  and  if  necessary  make  a  new  nut  and  glue 
it  in  position ;  all  the  old  nuts  and  frets  having  been  removed  as 
directed,  take  a  piece  of  ivory,  not  too  thin,  but  such  as  will  go  into  all 
the  grooves,  file  it  to  the  form  of  a  long  fret,   higher  considerably  at 

one  end  than  at  the  other,  make  a  number  of 
shallow  indents  on  one  side.  Now  place  this  piece 
of  ivory  in  the  groove  below  the  nut  of  the  lowest 
bass  string,  which  must  be  tuned  up  to  Eb  ;  press  the  knob  at  tlie  back 
and  fix  the  stop.  When  the  string  is  stretched  from  one  of  the 
notches,  and  gives  a  clear  ringing  sound  without  a  jar,  and  at  the 
same   time  when    the   stop  is    released   the  open  string    does    not  jar, 


THE    DITAL-HARP  107 

you  have  the  proper  height  of  the  fret.  Take  a  fine  pair  of  compasses 
and  measure  the  height  of  the  groove  (the  string  has  been  stretched 
over)  from  the  surface  of  the  wood.  Now  glue  the  nut  for  the  second 
string  (prepared  as  directed)  into  the  groove,  taking  particular  care 
that  the  string,  which  must  be  stretched  from  the  nut,  passes  directly 
through  the  eyehole.  Press  the  ivory  well  into  the  groove,  release 
the  string,  and  see  that  the  nut  is  perpendicular.  When  dry,  press 
the  lowest  bass  string  down  by  the  stop,  and  just  when  it  meets  the 
ivory  make  a  mark  on  either  side  of  the  string.  Now  cut  or  file 
between  the  lines  a  notch  just  the  thickness  of  the  string,  which 
notch  is  not  to  be  made  lower  than  the  measurement  previously  taken. 
Treat  all  the  other  nuts  and  frets  in  a  similar  manner,  and  you  will 
have  throughout  the  bass  the  proper  height  of  each  fret.  In  no  case 
can  the  fret  be  lowered,  so  if  there  is  a  jar  when  the  string  is  sti'uck 
from  the  nut,  if  the  string  is  sufiiciently  strung  and  is  of  the  proper 
thickness,  the  jar  arises  from  the  string  being  too  high,  and  the 
notch  in  the  nut  may  be  gradually  lowered,  testing  the  string  frequently 
until  the  jar  ceases.  A  performer  is  not  expected  to  pull  the  strings 
with  the  same  force  on  one  of  these  instruments  as  on  the  Pedal-Harp, 
but  considerable  force  can  be  used  when  the  instrument  is  properly 
constructed.  All  the  nuts  and  frets  having  been  so 
treated,  these  must  be  nicely  finished  oft'  in  a  uniform  l^ 
manner,  carefully  sandpapering  both  the  surface,  the  groove,  and  the 
notch  of  each,  and  afterwards  polishing  with  chamois  and  whiting. 

The  jarring,  if  it  only  occurs  on  a  few  of  the  strings  when  the 
Dital  stops  are  in  use,  may  be  prevented  by  putting  thin  strips  of 
leather  through  the  eyeholes,  drawing  them  tight  over  the  upper 
portion  of  the  eyeholes  and  fastening  them. 

The  arrangement  and  construction  of  the  nuts  and  frets  for  the 
treble  strings  are  more  troublesome  than  for  those  of  the  bass ;  for 
whereas  in  the  bass  there  is  only  a  difierence  in  the  plane  when 
the  key  is  changed  from  Eb,  in  the  treble  there  is  that  difierence, 
and  also  a  difference  in  the  spacing  of  the  strings.  So  taking  C, 
the  first  string,  with  a  Dital  stop,  and  B,  the  first  treble  string, 
when  preparing  the  nuts  and  frets,  they  must  be  arranged  so  as  to 
keep    the    open    string    D   sufficiently   apart    from    C,    to    allow   of  the 


108  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

removal  of  D  to  the  fret  without,  when  on  the  fret,  being  too  close  to 
C,  and  the  same  with  regard  to  the  other  treble  strings.      This  small 

diagram  represents  (as  seen  from  above)  the  nut,  1, 
)^4_,>'|V_,^     from  which  the  Eb  string  is  stretched,  and  the  fret, 

2,  on  which  the  D  string  may  occasionally  be  placed. 
The  Eb  string  is  shown  in  two  positions:  at  3  it  is  on  the  nut; 
when  removed  from  the  nut  to  the  fret  it  is  at  4.  The  D  string  is 
also  shown  in  two  positions :  when  on  the  nut  it  is  at  5,  the  fret  being 
so  arranged  as  to  prevent  jarring ;  at  2  it  is  as  it  would  be  when 
removed  from  the  nut  to  the  fret.  The  treble  strings  must  not  jar  when 
on  the  nuts,  and  they  must  not  jar  when  on  the  frets ;  and  there  should 
be  no  liability  on  the  part  of  any  of  the  strings  to  jump  from  either  nut 
or  fret  when  struck  on  either  one  side  or  the  other.  All  that  has  been 
described  has  been  carried  out  on  No.  160,  and  with  complete  success. 

STRINGS 

As  the  Dital-Harp  strings  are  as  a  rule  shorter  than  the  corre- 
sponding strings  upon  the  Pedal-Harp,  and  as  many  of  these  instruments 
are  lightly  constructed  and  unable  to  withstand  the  excessive  strain 
caused  by  the  tension  of  ordinary  Harp  strings,  thinner  strings  must  be 
selected.  No  doubt  the  three  lowest  strings  on  the  British-Lute-Harp 
were  silk  and  wire,  but  it  is  unnecessary  that  the  corresponding  strings 
on  the  early  Dital-Harps  should  be  so. 

On  a  Dital-Harp,  the  longest  or  nineteenth  string  of  which  is  24|: 
inches,  and  the  shortest  string  8f  inches,  the  following  strings  may  be  used  : 
For  the  Eb  string,  B  4th  octave,  or  perhaps  even  A  4th  octave,  Erard's 
gauge.  The  F  string,  C  4th  octave,  Erard's  gauge,  and  all  the  others 
one-fourth  thinner  than  the  corresponding  strings  on  the  Pedal-Harp. 

For  instruments  of  a  late  make,  where  the  longest  string  is 
27yV  inches,  and  the  shortest  7*  inches,  strings  one-third  thinner  than 
the  corresponding  strings  on  the  Pedal-Harp  will  be  more  suitable. 
If  there  is  any  difficulty  in  procuring  strings  of  the  proper  gauge  stained 
black  and  red  for  the  F  and  C  strings,  ordinary  white  or  clear  strings 
of  the  correct  gauge  can  be  stained  by  passing  cotton  wool  saturated 
with  black  or  red  ink  over  them,  and  when  dry,  olive  oil.  It  is  better 
the  stringing  of  the  instrument  should  be  attended  to  by  the  person 


THE    DITAL-HARP 


109 


who  intends  to  perform  upon  it,  otherwise  strings  totally  unfit  for 
the  instrument  may  be  placed  upon  it,  and  perhaps  the  sounding- 
board  seriously  damaged.  Probably  the  difficulty  of  getting  lightly 
constructed  instruments  to  withstand  the  tension  of  such  a  number  of 
strings  was  the  cause  of  the  construction  of  the  heavy  and  rigid 
instruments  previously  noticed. 

Proper  strings  having  been  provided  for  the  Harp,  all  the  Dital 
stops  being  released,  and  all  the  treble  strings  upon  the  nuts,  the 
lowest  string  is  to  be  tuned  to  Eb  French  pitch,  or  Dtl  on  the  Piano, 
and  the  remaining  strings  tuned  in  a  series  of  fifths  and  octaves  as 
shown  on  the  following  diagram. 


/    -O, 


-©■ 


«a    I  •\   ^ 


1 


-«>- 


^Q_ 


\     ,-o^ 


\      .'-S2. 


~cr 


Cadence  or  Proof. 


^\\\\\\  l\^^  II 


^ 


^ 


m 


Scale  or  Gamut  of  the  Dital-Harp. 

Right  Hand _    c-    o>   -e>- 


"CV 


Fipts 


v.-\   o 


T   -^    • 

Left  Hand         ^-  .^^  ia. 


-e- 


-o- 


3k3: 


THE    CHROMATIC    SCALE. 
To  shew  the  use  and  order  of  all  the  Ditals  and  Stopped  Notes . 


^.  k^.M^ii*'"!'-^  'r 


;i>|>T^..|oT.|-^'i^'^"i^^"- 


^ 


or  or 


or  or 


h'Ul.  l^rjj.^'Hoff.  p^l|» 


v-«*-tl 


^:4 


iz^i. 


l?l-re*2".<'   3'!       J'^^U^ 


i>^l^^ 


i 


Tir~ 


no  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

The  bars  include  the  notes  which  each  string  can  be  made  to 
])roduce.  The  seraibreve  shows  the  note  the  string  sounds  in  its 
natural  state ;  the  crotchets,  the  notes  which  can  be  produced  from 
the  strings  when  the  Dital  stops  are  used.  A  Dital  can  be  fixed  by 
first  pressing  against  it  the  second  joint  of  the  first  finger  when  bent, 
and  then  drawing  it  downwards ;  a  slight  upward  movement  will 
release  it.  The  semitones  are  to  be  made  on  the  treble  strings,  when 
there  are  no  Dital  stops,  by  pressing  the  strings  just  above  the 
frets. 

MANNER   OF   HOLDING    AND    PLAYING    UPON    THE    DITAL -HARP 

Place  the  instrument  in  the  lap  nearly  perpendicular,  but  inclining 
a  little  to  the  left,  so  that  the  performer  may  just  have  a  side  view 
of  the  strings.  The  arms  should  be  a  little  raised,  in  an  easy  semi- 
circular form ;  the  left  wrist  alone  should  be  allowed  to  touch  the 
instrument,  which  rests  against  it,  the  left  hand  being  free  to  pull 
the  bass  strings  as  shown  in  the  illustration.  The  thumb  and  fingers 
of  the  right  hand  are  to  grasp  the  treble  strings.  Place  the  thumb, 
which  must  always  he  held  as  iipright  as  2^ossihle,  upon  the  E  string, 
and  the  three  first  fingers  upon  the  next  strings.  Strike  with  the 
thumb,  then  pull  with  the  first  finger,  which  falls,  then  with  the 
second  finger,  cross  the  thumb  to  the  B  string,  and  immediately  pull 
with  the  third  finger,  and  place  the  three  fingers  in  position.  As  a 
rule,  the  fingers  are  always  on  the  strings  ;  that  is,  before  a  movement 
is  concluded,  the  thumb  or  fingers  are  preparing  for  what  is  to 
follow.  Chords  are  generally  played  as  arpeggios,  i.e.  the  thumb 
and  the  three  fingers  grasp  the  strings,  and  by  a  sudden  turn  of 
the  wrist  the  thumb  strikes  first,  and  then  three  fingers  pull  in 
succession. 

Exercise  for  the  Left  hand.  Exercise  for  the  Right  hand. 


Ex:2. 

7 

Bass 


THE    DITAL-HAEP 


111 


Ex:3.3 


Treble 


^^pirfeg^,[?^ff?^ 


+  3  21  gi  + 


[,i7^j.ii^jjjjijnf]^M'j^i^irF^  p  j  II 


Ex:J7 


Ex-.7S. 


^^^^^^^^^^^^J 


When  playing  Ex.  11,  slide  the  thumb  from  the  G  to  the  Ab  strino- 
at  the  moment  the  Bb  string  is  pulled  by  the  first  finger ;  then  slide 
the  thumb  from  the  Ab  string  to  the  Bb  string,  when  the  second  fino-er 
pulls  the  C  string,  and  immediately  the  first  and  second  fingers  cross 
the  third,  and  are  placed  upon  the  strings  above.  Then  slide  the  thumb 
from  the  Bb  string  to  the  C  string,  when  the  third   finger  pulls  the 


112 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


D  string.     The  third  finger  is  then  to  be  placed  upon  the  string  above 


the  second  finger. 


When  descending,  the  fingers  are  not  to  slide. 


Ex.M 


SLIDE  ASCENDING. 


SLIDE  DESCENDING. 


When  playing  Ex.  14,  the  thumb  slides  from  Bb  to  C,  then  strikes 
the  C  string,  and  the  fingers  pull  the  D,  E,  and  F  strings  in  succession. 
When  descending,  the  third  finger  slides.  A  line  above  or  below  two 
notes  indicates  that  the  thumb  or  the  third  finger  is  to  slide. 

When  playing  six  notes  in  succession,  the  thumb  and  the  first  finger 
ai-e  on  the  strings.  The  thumb  strikes,  then  crosses  to  the  string  above 
the  first  finger,  the  first  finger  pulls  the  string,  and  the  thumb  and 
the  three  fingers  strike  and  pull  in  succession. 

To  produce  harmonic  tones,  press  slightly  the  edge  of  the  right 
hand,  just  below  the  little  finger,  as  near  to  the  centre  of  the  string  as 
possible.  Then  strike  the  string  with  the  middle  finger,  and  at  the 
same  instant  remove  the  hand  from  the  string. 

When  four  succeeding  notes  fall  upon  the  same  line  or  space,  they 
should  be  fingered  by  the  thumb  and  the  three  fingers  in  succession. 

THE  GRACES  IN    GENERAL  USED  ON  THE  HARP. 

The  Plain  Turn  as  mark'd ExplainVt. 


Turn  after  the  Note Explain'd.   InvertedlXirn Explaind.     The  Slur Explaind. 


Slur  after  the  Note Explaind.  The  double  Appog-iatura Explaind. 


THE    DITAL-HARP 


113 


The  Shake  — 


Explained. 


Grace  and  Shake E  xpIainM. 


i 


ii^fi 


jjjjjjjjj  II 


i=* 


1  + 


1^  + 


I 


The  Beat thisGraceis  always  made  from  a  semitone  below.       Explain'd. 


i 


As  it  is  impossible,  in  such  a  work  as  this,  to  give  many  exercises, 
a  Harp  Tutor  (if  possible  with  exercises  in  Eb)  had  better  be  procured,^ 
and  the  fingering  reversed.  After  a  little  practice,  one  or  two  interviews 
with  a  professional  harpist  will  be  of  advantage,  as,  although  unable 
to  play  the  Dital-Harp,  he  could  detect  an  incorrect  method  of  playing 
in  another. 

So  far  all  the  exercises,  etc.,  have  been  in  the  key  of  Eb,  the  original 
key.  By  attending  to  the  directions  hereafter  given,  the  Dital-Harp  can 
be  played  upon  in  seven  additional  major  keys. 

To  change  from  Eb  to  Bb  major,  fix 
the  Ditals  for  the  A  strings,  and  remove 
the  A  string  in  the  treble  from  the  nut 
to  the  fret.  Cadence 


ffi'iailiii 


5€ 


?8 


g^^ 


To  change  from  Eb  to  F  major,  fix     /(?,       ^^  ■?;  3g  a       s- 
the  Ditals  for  the  A  and  E  strings,  and     Iff^'*-' T  T  ^'  ^F  '  ^' |  ^^ 


3 


PE 


U 


iH  ij  li  li  \i 


PfT 


^ 


remove  the  A  and  E  strings  in  the  treble 
from  the  nuts  to  the  frets.  Cadence 

To  change  from  Eb  to  C  major,  fix 
the  Ditals  for  the  A,  E,  and  B  strings, 
and  remove  the  A,  E,  and  B  strings  in 
the  treble  from  the  nuts  to  the  frets. 

Cadence 

To  change  from  Eb  to  G  major,  fix 

the  Ditals  for  the  A,  E,  B,  and  F  strings, 

and  remove  the  A,  E,  B,  and  F  strings 

in  the  treble  from  the  nuts  to  the  frets. 

Cadence 

'  The  First  Six  Weeks  for  the  Harp,  by  N.  C.  Bocbsa,  is  excellent,  but  requires  to  be  transposed. 

P 


114 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


To  change  from  E  b  to  D  major,  fix  the 
Ditals  for  the  A,  E,  B,  F,  and  C  strings, 
and  remove  the  A,  E,  B,  and  F  strings 
in  the  treble  from  the  nuts  to  the  frets. 

Cadence 

To  change  from  Eb  to  A  major,  fix  the 
Ditals  for  the  A,  E,  B,  F,  and  G  strings, 
and  remove  the  A,  E,  B,  and  F  strings 
in  the  treble  from  the  nuts  to  the  frets. 

Cadence 

To  change  from  Eb  to  EK  major,  fix 
the  Ditals  for  all  the  bass  strings,  and 
remove  all  the  strings  in  the  treble  from 
the  nuts  to  the  frets.  Cadence 


lyr^JlJfJTh^ 


s 


ip 


i; 


^m 


^ 


:&: 


+g 


ffl'-lftftf!^ 


*5 


^; 


m^ 


^ 


k 


^^ 


^^ 


The  key  of  EtJ  is  scarcely  used,  as  the  music  can  be  played  in  Eb. 

After  playing  in  any  key,  except  Eb,  all  the  Ditals  that  have  been  fixed 
should  be  released,  and  all  the  strings  on  the  frets  removed  to  the  nuts. 

The  writer  has  not  met  with  music  in  a  minor  key  for  this  instrument, 
but  presumably  the  Dital-Harp  can  be  played  in  the  same  minor  keys  as 
the  Single  Action  Harp. 

Before  concluding  this  chapter,  the  writer  considers  it  desirable  to 
notice  the  manner  in  which  the  Dital-Harp  has  been  represented  by  artists. 


THE   INSTRUMENT    AS    REPRESENTED    BY   ARTISTS 

Some  years  since  a  drawing  entitled  "The  Harp-Lute"  appeared 
in  the  Water-Colour  Room  of  the  Royal  Academy.  In  this  picture 
a  lady  is  represented,  presumably  in  the  act  of  playing  upon  an  instru- 
ment which  is  not  a  Harp-Lute,  as  the  artist  supposed,  but  is  a 
Dital-Harp.  The  instrument  is  placed  with  the  shortest  strings 
nearest  to  the  performer ;  in  fact,  in  an  incorrect  and  absurd  position. 
Later  on,  another  picture  was  exhibited  at  the  Royal  Academy,  in 
which  a  lady  is  represented  as  singing  and  presumably  accompanying 
herself  upon  a  Dital-Harp.  In  this  picture  the  longest  strings  are 
nearest  to  the  supposed  perfoi-mer,  and  so  far  it  is  correct.      But   the 


THE    DITAL-HAEP  11& 

instrument,  which  is  unsupported  as  it  should  be  by  the  left  wrist, 
is  leaning  back,  and  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  instead  of  grasping 
or  pulling  the  bass  strings  as  is  usual,  or  pressing  or  releasing  a  Dital 
stop  in  the  bass,  or  pressing  a  string  to  a  fret  in  the  treble,  as  they 
occasionally  may  be,  are  represented  as  wandering  over  or  pulling 
portions  of  the  strings  high  above  the  nuts,  from  which  no  notes  can 
be  produced.  One  would  suppose  that  the  first  thing  an  artist,  who 
wishes  to  introduce  an  instrument  into  a  picture,  should  be  acquainted 
with,  is  the  correct  manner  in  which  the  instrument  to  be  I'epresented 
should  be  held  when  played  upon  ;  but  the  producers  of  these  pictures, 
who  by  their  works  have  handed  down  to  posterity  representations  of 
this  once  favourite  instrument  as  being  played  upon,  show  that  they 
are  or  were  singularly  ignorant  of  the  matter. 

MUSIC 

In  the  following  list,  the  music  published  for  the  British-Lute-Harp 
appears  in  Italics.  These  pieces  and  others  were  afterwards  advertised 
as  "  Music  already  published  for  the  Patent  Dital-Harp  " : — 

A  New  and  Complete  Directory. 

Euterpe's  Melange,  containing  a  variety  of  favourite  National  Airs. 

Divertimentos     or    Airs     with    Variations,     with     Introductory 
Preludes — 

No.  1.  Air  from  Achille  et  Deidamie. 

No.  2.   A  favourite  Tema  Fleyel. 

No.  3.  "  0  Dolce  Concento." 

No.  4.  "Ah!  vous  dirai-je." 

No.  5.  "Ar  hyd  y  nos." 

No.  6.  "  Ye  Banks  and  Braes." 

Duets  for   the   Dital-Harp,   and  Pianoforte,  with   Flute  Accom- 
paniment— 
No.  1.  "  E  Amore  un  Ladroncello." 
No.  2.   "  Non  jnH  Andrai." 
No.  3.   "  La  mia  Dorabella." 
No.  4.   "  Notte  e  Giorno,  and  Batti,  batti." 


116  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

Six  Canzonets  for  the  Voice,  with  an  Accompaniment  for  the  Dital- 

Earp  or  Pianoforte. 
Melodia  Sacra,  or  a  choice  Collection  of  the  most  favourite  Hymns. 
Favourite  Airs  and  Waltzes,  etc.     Set  1. 
Six  Venetian  Canzonets,  with  an  Accompaniment  for  the  Dital- 

Harp  or  Pianoforte. 
Favourite  Airs  and  Waltzes,  etc.     Set  2. 
Preludes  and  Cadences  in  various  keys.     By  Richard  Light. 
Single  Songs  with  an  Accompaniment : — 

"  Sei  bella,  sei  buona,"  Canzonetta  Napoletana. 

I  saw  thee  weep.     Canzonet.      Poetry  by  Lord  Byron.     Music 
by  K.  Light. 

Kate  Kearney.     Canzonet. 

Amante  Irresoluto.    Canzonetta  Pastorale.    Music  by  R  Light. 

0  Nanny,  wilt  thou  gang  with  me  ? 

The  Fairy  Bower.     Canzonet.     Music  by  R.  Light. 

C'est  toujours  Toi. 

Far  in  the  West.      By  R.  Light. 

To  thy  Spirit  I  Bow.     By  R.  Light. 

In  both  the  1st  and  2nd  editions  of  the  Directory  there  are  easy 
pieces  in  the  eight  keys,  and  in  the  second  edition  a  few  vocal  pieces, 
with  accompaniments,  and  two  Duets  for  the  Dital-Harp  and  Pianoforte. 
Richard  Light  also  arranged  a  number  of  Airs,  such  as — The  Blue  Bells 
of  Scotland,  The  Clifton  Waltz,  Minuette  from  Don  Giovanni,  and  a 
Welsh  Rondo  for  the  Dital-Harp  and  Pianoforte.  No  doubt  much 
additional  music  was  written  or  arranged  for  the  Dital-Harp,  but  with 
the  exception  of  No.  3  of  Divertimentos,  etc.,  and  a  fragment  of  Favourite 
Airs  and  Waltzes,  etc.,  No.  1,  both  reproduced,  the  writer  has  not  met 
with  any  advanced  music  for  the  instrument. 


THE    DITAL-HARP 


117 


EXERCISESfor BOTH  HAXDS, to  FACILITATE  the  FINGERING. 


Hx-.U.- 


^m^'^     f> 


F^yq  w^mmm^ 


m 


m 


+  12 


21        + 


Ex:  13. 


1  m ''  fU?^  1^  ^  fTi^'^  ri'iJ 


i +i+_+      +^-iJ_jt-+        +<LJ_jL>      +  +  1  +   i 


^ 


ffTfi     I'T^i      ilT}"i    i-^T^i   ^t^  « 


^=E^^ 


* 


I 


1^ T" 


BY  EDWARD  UOHT. 


118  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


AGROUND,  with  Variations,    or  the  Pupil's  daily  practise. 


TEMPO ' 


^SES 


W 


GIVSTO 


f^Mfrfffffff-rftmr^^^ 


i^^^B^ 


Br  EDWARD  UOHT. 


THE    DITAL-HAEP 


119 


Allegro  Moderato.  3 


BY  EDWARD  LIOBT, 


Divertimentos  fi'.'S. 


120 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


n DOLCE  CONCESTO 

•12 


Mozart. 


Alleeretto  «  ^  ? 


Allegretto 


ci    ■ 


^ 


m^^ 


ijl.<hr  IrpfTT^^ 


^1    ^  r   ^W=^ 


E^ 


1   3 


V        3 


y;j#j^j4ijy3to-  ^'jji^  ^  ^  ^\}v^wi3 


rll    '  r  |^7~F  r  !r  r  '   fir  F  (»H"  Ir  p  r  pII     f  r  if  r  f  r  I  |»  r  l»i 


'C       ^ 


13    1 


■,„.^a$^ 


flfj  'm'  r  n  iJSi^ 


g^ 


p     ri 


I^TJ^I 


i:^ 


f^^    riff     If 


^ 


^w^fTT 


i — '  p  p 


^ft^ffir^'^iM^^g^Pi^ 


•r  r  i»  ^ 


^ 


feiSfeg 


w   .:L'*jj_^ 


* 


jp  -r  ^ 


?^ 


tnr 


Divertimentos  N'.'3. 


AUBANCED  BY  EDWARD  UOBT. 


THE    DITAL-HAKP 


121 


^^^ 


^tfc«iErre-"l4arB3rearefefej^3^:fa=l^^ 


^^^^^^^^^^11 


1 


-Uj— .^- 


2  S 


^ 


:i__:.f.;_„|_.---_^_^ 


.„ — ^^ 


pg^^i^rr^zE-^-zg^-a 


=^ 


armt 


J^ 


^Efejrrr^ 


IB — rp- 


3 


J-       3  I      I 


^^^^^m^^^^^^^m 


fe 


-^— 


*-     +    ■* 


^^^ 


^^ 


3        Harmonicis- 


,...^^^^^^^^^^^ 


s. 


^€5^ 


^cfife,    ,    jt:^ 


t=pt 


SSt 


^^^^^^^^^^^^ 


•^S^^^^^^ffff^l^^j^ 


Divertimentos  Iii?  3. 


AREASGED  BV  EI/WARD  UOHT. 


Q 


122 


MUSICAL   INSTRUMENTS 


ji;''i„iriijii^fi%i;]fflj  j'liiijHfjij 


^ 


f— F-.-+f—4 


mx^^f=^ 


F=^ 


^^^f#f#fc^^-f4f-p-f-£^f^ 


Divertimentos   N"  3. 


ARRANCED  BV  EDWARD  UGBT. 


THE    DITAL-HAEP 


123 


+   2 


+   '.i 


KiR 


i 


^^ 


•^h.^^^J^'-^Na-J^^ 


W 


"■I'J.    n 


f  1^   ^    1^  ^ 


:= JTI* 


^ 


I 


^ 


riTr^n^'Wir^'Y'n'^'^i^^  J 


llyl.  r  I  1         1  ^ 


^^ 


^ 


E=^ 


i^fc^ 


^iS 


s 


I 


m 


^^0 


'  2**  ' 


p       lit 


% 


s^ 


^  .  if .  r  .  i^^ 


rrri 


s 


I^^VHggTtol^tc^Klf^^l^^i'^^SJjg^- 


i?!jOM     ' 


_Q- 


-El. 


m 


Divertimentos  N?3. 


AltRANCED  BY  EDWARD  UOHT, 


124 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

THE  CUCKOO 


WORDS  AMD  MUSIC  BY  MISS  MAROARET  OASSON. 


W^ 


DrrAL-HAllf. 


F'M^ 


^^il 


i 


2EK 


:tf.(^  f  f  f  rrf^f-'^Ttwf 


■m^^^^^s^ 


•^^^m 


i^ 


^ 


1 


i 


^ 


^E^ 


33 


^J    d      I 


^ — p-z^* 


^^^4^^^^^^m 


r 


^^^^^=F^^ 


^ 


% 


i^^J^-^-i^zrj^ 


Now     tho  flun     is  in       the    west, 

Cheer  -  ful  see     yon       shep  -  berd    boy, 


Sink  -  -  ing  slow      bo  -  hind         the  trees,  And      the  Cuck-oo, 

Climb --iiig  up         the    crag gy   rocks,  As        he  views  tho 


\       \g. . . __. 


I 


j:,hr-  <.^ 


es 


I  I'l  n- 


I  1  i 


f§^^^^ 


F=S= 


m 


£E 


Ef^ 


^ 


rrr'^W 


wul  ■  come  guest^ 
dap  -  -  pled    sky, 


Gent-    -ly  wooa    tho       ev' -- ning  breeze :  i  ,   n    t         ,       r-    ,        ,   /^    . 

'  °  ]      Click- 00 !    Cuck-oo!       Cuck-oo!   Cuck-oo! 

Pleas'd,      theCuck-oo'»      note     he  mocks:  I 


""i-"l.  1       "1 


pEE^E^ 


Gent ly    woos      the       ev'  -  ning  breeze. 

Pleas'd,      the  Cuck  •  *  oo's      note     he  mocks. 


j^^^^^^^^ 


m 


^ 


Sport-  ivo    now   iho 
Novr         rtd-vaii-ciiig 


k 


p^^^^ 


^ 


w=^m 


THE    DITAL-HARP 


125 


THE  CUCKOO. 


j^J  J  ij.  i-r^mm 


m 


yvp  I"  r 


3^ 


swal  -  Iowa    play, 
o'er      the     plain 


Light  •    ly  skim  -  ming    o'er         the  brook,  Dart  -     ing  swift  thcv    wing    their    way, 

Ev'-  ning's  dus-  ky      shades       appear,  And       the  Cuckoo's       voice     a — gain 


m 


irri 


^^^^^^^ 


5=a: 


^   '   J 


Home  •  ward    to     their         peace  -  ful     nook. 
Soft-  ly       steals     up on      the     ear, 


Whilst    tho  Cutk  -  oo,      bird    of    Spring,  Still  a  -  midst    the 

While       ret.ir--ing       from    the   view,  Thus        she  bids       the 


^^pW^^pWpi 


±c=m 


m 


^m 


^^^^^i^i^^^^^^iS 


trees    doth  sii 


day        a  -  dieu  :  / 


'^ '  I  Click  -  00  !    Cui;k  -  00 !  Cuck  ■  oo  !    Cuok  ■  oo  ! 


Still         .t  -  midst     the     trees     doth     sing. 
Thus      she  bids        the      dav       a-  -  dieu. 


jf^j^^^^^^^- 


'I    I'l    'I  ^ 


rfc: 


m 


fc 


<^v-a 

±--r — \ 


jot 


m^- 


TKlTg 


S 


m&m^ 


126 


MUSICAL   INSTEUMENTS 


MISS  WADE'S  MINUET." 


DITAL-HAKP. 


DOLCE. 


^fi-^-jJij  ^■■iifiujtftti^siinnm^^^ 


/•'■A,'  ^^irr^H'i  ^gfc 


tfff 


^ 


# 


ffi 


*n^ 


^^S^^^^s^^ 


fei^H-^rfTl;^.i..>pf 


^S 


?? 


^ 


^^^ 


fei 


P 


g#=^^-tf^qs;^ 


\  -  FIXK. 


'^^ 


m-ff-^Ym 


SS* 


^^1 


»s 


p^ 


TRIO 


^ffffff%f-^^l^^aMf^j^^rj^ 


^ 


/..,=Pf%f^-^4-f,l 


#— * 


M 


^2_ 


P 


m, 


1  This  minuet  was  composed  by  Signor  Edelmans,  and  is  the  concludin;;  movemont  of  bta  Sonata  1  Op.  7.  The  minuet  alone  will  be 
found  in  Budd's  Divertimentos  for  tlie  Harp,  Op.  2,  p.  16,  but  without  the  oomposer's  name  Later  on  it  was  published  as  a  Trio  for 
stringed  intttruments,  as  Mise  Wade'!)  Minuet,  but  without  the  composer's  name. 


THE    DITAL-HAKP 


127 


MISS  WADE'S  MINUET. 


P^ 


{^m^mmm^^i^^m 


^mm^^-w^mm 


D.  C. 


^^^^ 


BEAUTIFUL  AKE  THE  FIELDS. 
SIB  BENBT  BI3H0F. 


„TNO. 


<P^^g^ 


f^^Pf 


^ 


DITAL-HAEP.  <  CON  EXPRESS!. 


^^'1  r  I  r^-^=E^^  I  f  r  rp-r=g 


d?±: 


pggqf1-^s^ 


<r^,;ttr-^ 


(FixD)  (UoFF) 


c/eeres 


128 


MUSICAL    I  N  S  T  E  r  ]M  E  X  T  S 


,/l   FArofilTE    AJIi 


Martini. 


(^ 


i 


1 — -f 


s 


ji-^ 


a"-— a: 


f=±^ 


#  •  -^  - 


^^^1  r  f,D^£^^^^^^^ 


ffeEJ^^f^^g^^^^gg^^fefg^^^ 


^^^ 


r::gqF 


■^     Crest  '      '  ' 


-=l-P; 


t 


.-e    :r: 


(/Vj^) 


Uir.r.irT-^-g^:^ 


^zzfc^rti^z^rr^ 


^ 


T"r'*r 


O-^/^ 


^^P^^^^^^ 


^ 


3^ 


(A  oft)       \t 


1^  .      -•■.-*• 


I 


« 


rT~"E 


^ 


^ 


^ 


^ 


#-# 


^J^^i^^^J^^^^MiULJll^ 


^ 


3? 


;«.^ 


-r 


P 


m 


i 


^ 


0     •     a    ' 


2=B:r:rB±qrr)E 


^ 


frtmnW 


p 


ft^JC^&z^zttrt 


t=t8 


i± 


^^ 


^ 


^ 


=t^ 


t- 


ijlM 


;>c 


ia=^ 


^-»  »  • 


^ 


:!. 


^^-^ 


Airs  and  Waltzes  N9l. 


ARRANGED  1!Y  EDWARD  LIGHT. 


o 
< 

q: 

> 


< 


< 
X 


in 

cr 

CL 


a 


THE    HARP-VENTUKA 

The  reader  may  recollect  how  Light,  when  endeavouring  to  produce  a 
Chromatic  Harp-Lute,  invented  a  totally  different  instrument.  Where 
Light  failed,  a  more  ingenious  mechanist  almost  succeeded. 

Angelo  Benedetto  Ventiu-a,'  Professor  of  the  Harp-Lute,  Spanish 
Guitar,  Lyre,  Apollo  Lyre,  and  of  the  Harp- Ventura  (who  had  formerly 
been  instructor  to  the  Princess  Charlotte  of  Wales),  now  came  to  the 
front,  and  on  the  21st  February  1828  obtained  a  patent  for  certain 
improvements  on  the  Harp -Lute.  As  the  statement  in  the  speci- 
fication is  brief,  the  writer  thinks  it  advisable  to  reprint  it  in  extenso, 
so  that  the  reader  may  see  how  difficult  it  is  to  understand  from 
Ventura's  diagrams  and  descriptions  the  manner  in  which  the  keys  or 
stops  become  fixed  when  the  mechanism  is  worked  by  what  he  calls 
the  lever  action  : — 

"  The  first  is  my  improvement  on  the  Harp-Lute,  now  called  by 
me  the  Harp- Ventura,  and  is  represented  by  a  complete  drawing  of 
the  instrument  marked  with  the  letters  A,  standing  upright  on  a  flat 
bottom  by  itself,  the  front  outwards,  without  any  pedestal,  and  has  a 
small  box  underneath  which  opens  by  a  spring  for  the  convenience  of 
carrying  a  small  quantity  of  strings  and  the  like  at  the  top,  for  the 
purpose  of  holding  the  tuning  key.  The  body  of  this  instrument  is 
a  diflerent  shape  to  any  yet  ever  invented,  and  will  be  further  described 
hereafter.       This    instrument   consists    of  seventeen   strings   marked    C 

•  He  resided  at  2  Little  Titohlield  Street,  Port-  Besides    aa    Imperial    Harp-Lute,    Ventvira   also 

land   Street,   in    IS  15.       We   hear  of  him  at  48  invented  and  patented  an  improved  Guitar  which 

Cirencester  Place,   Portland  Place,   in  1828,   and  he  called  the  Ventura  Guitar.      This  instrument 

later  on  at  43  Great  Mary-le-bone  Street,  Portland  has    seven    strings,    a   hollow    finger-board    with 

Place.      It  may  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  state  mechanism,  and  some  special  mechanism  attached 

that  Ventura  invented   an   instrument  called   by  to  the  seventh  string.      The  instrument  is  illus- 

him  the  Tmperyal  Lyre.     A  specimen  appears  to  trated   and  described  in   the   specification  which 

have  been  recently  sold  by  Messrs.   Puttick  and  forms    part   of  that    of   21st    February   1828   for 

Simpson,  and  is  described  by  a  correspondent  as  the  Harp-Ventura.     He  wrote  principally  for  the 

"  smaller   than    the    Lyre-Guitar "   (an    error  for  Guitar,    but   he   also   wrote    for   the    Harp-Lute, 

"Apollo-Lyre"),   and  as  having  twelve   strings.  Imperial  Lyre,  etc. 


130  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

(two  more  may  be  added  to  the  bass) ;  some  of  these  strings  are  made 
of  catgut,  some  of  catgut  and  silk  covered  with  wire,  my  invention, 
and  some  of  silk  covered  with  wire,  seven  of  which  strings  are  played 
upon  three  different  finger-boards  (marked  with  the  letters  D),  with 
frets  or  bars  on  them  ;  the  rest  of  the  strings  are  fixed  to  the  top  of 
the  neck  of  the  instrument  to  part  of  a  machine,  after  the  manner 
of  the  grand  Pedal-Harp,  each  string  passing  between  a  fork  for  the 
purpose  of  altering  the  notes  from  their  original  tone  to  the  flat,  sharp, 
or  natural,  performed  by  the  other  part  of  the  machine  fixed  near  the 
finger-board  in  the  neck  of  the  instrument  called  a  poUice,  and  which 
will  be  more  particularly  described  hereafter.  The  great  improvement 
of  this  instrument  is,  that  it  has  all  the  properties  of  the  grand  Pedal- 
Harp,  as  well  as  that  of  the  instrument  the  Harp-Lute,  and  which  is 
produced  by  the  construction  of  the  body,  and  the  machinery  fixed  to 
the  top  and  neck  of  the  instrument  now  about  to  be  described.  The 
machine  affixed  to  the  neck  and  top  of  the  instrument  (see  Drawing 
marked  X,  X)  is  made  part  of  brass  or  other  metal,  pai't  steel,  and 
part  watch-spring,  and  is  as  follows  : — 

"The  Figure  1  in  the  Drawing  is  a  representation  of  the  stud  to 
support  the  strings  intended  for  the  bass ;  2,  the  fork  between  which 
the  strings  pass  to  alter  the  note  from  its  original  tone  to  flat,  sharp, 
or  natural  ;  3,  the  arber  to  screw  into  the  fork ;  4,  the  spring  to  attach 
to  the  arber,  and  fixed  to  a  small  pillar  to  make  the  fork  act ;  5  is 
the  small  pillar,  with  a  cavity  to  admit  the  spring,  which  is  fastened 
with  a  small  pin ;  6  is  a  representation  of  two  of  the  poUice  levers,  one 
with  a  straight  end,  and  one  bent ;  7,  the  lever  spring  to  catch  the 
lever  to  make  the  fork  act,  which  is  performed  by  a  pull  with  the  thvunb ; 
8,  the  trigger  to  attach  to  the  lever  spring,  which  makes  the  fork  act 
instantaneous,  it  being  connected  with  the  conductors  hereafter  de- 
scribed ;  9  is  a  representation  of  a  poUice  performed  by  pressure ;  1 1  is 
a  representation  of  the  before-mentioned  sections  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8, 
complete  with  the  conductors  and  cranks,  as  in  the  machine,  it  being  a 
single  action  acting  only  on  one  of  the  forks  ;  12,  the  like  representation, 
with  the  conductors  and  cranks  acting  on  two  of  the  forks,  which 
may  be  increased  to  three  or  more  ;  13  is  the  like  by  pressure  and 
crank;   14,  a  representation  of  the  seven  poUices  complete  by  lever; 


V 


en 

^ 

CO 

'^^ 

tn 

^ 

en 

v^, 

en 

<i--^ 

en 

<^ 

ca 

<ir, 

" 

^ 

^ 

o 
o 

® 

<; 

^ 

-\ 

>^ 

o 

0 

% 

o 

<D 

Vi 

C:^ 

o 

o 

d' 

^ 

o 
o 

1 

1 

0 

1 

o| 

0 

0 

E. 


0 


fe..      -) 


5t>: 

ft 

is 
-ft, 

2^ 


o  ■- 


1 

s 


■s 
Si 


I 


THE    HAEP-VENTTJEA  131 

15,  the  like  by  pressure.  B  represents  a  ponte  volante,  or  shifting 
bridge,  fixed  at  the  bottom  of  the  body  of  the  instrument,  and  under 
which  is  a  small  machine  to  touch  the  springs  fixed  to  the  string 
bridge,  which  make  the  imitation  of  the  bassoon;^  16,  a  representation 
of  the  ponte  volante  ofi"  the  instrument;  17,  the  machine  to  imitate 
the  bassoon.  E  represents  the  side  of  the  instrument,  which  is  from 
the  front  to  the  back  of  a  slanting  position,  thereby  making  the  back 
near  one-third  less  in  size  than  the  front.  F  represents  the  back  of 
the  instrument,  being  flat  on  each  side  with  the  middle  round  to 
improve  the  tone." 

The  writer  has  carefully  examined  an  early  Harp-Ventura,  the 
mechanism  of  which  is  worked  by  pressure,  and  it  will  perhaps  simplify 
matters  to  ignore  the  specification  and  describe  the  instrument  and 
mechanism,  both  of  which  are  shown  by  the  plate.  The  Harp- Ventura 
resembles  in  appearance  the  Harp-Lute,  but  is  larger^  and  has  little 
of  the  graceful  form  of  that  instrument.  It  is,  however,  a  most 
ingenious  and  almost  perfect  instrument ;  that  is,  almost  as  perfect  as 
a  Single  Action  Hai-p.  It  has  three  finger-boards,  and  originally  had 
ten  bass  strings,  afterwards  increased  to  twelve,  and  with  the  latter 
number  has  the  unusual  compass  of  four  octaves.  The  instrument  has 
a  piece  of  silk  and  wire  protruding  from  a  hole  at  the  left  side  of  the 
lower  end  to  which  the  ribbon  is  to  be  attached,  the  other  end  of 
which  is  fastened  to  the  lower  portion  of  the  capital  which  surmounts 
the  pillar,  the  instrument  being  held  slantingly  across  the  chest.^ 
Along  the  inner  side  of  the  neck  are  seven  stops  or  keys,  each  one 
of  which  when  pressed  home  shortens  one  or  two  of  the  strings ;  that 
is,  when  there  are  two  of  the  same  in  the  bass  both  strings  are 
shortened  at  the  same  time  by  the  action  of  one  stop  or  key.  Thus, 
what  the  feet  accomplish  on  the  Pedal- Harp  is  here  effected  in  the 
bass  by  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand.      A  movable  rest  covers  the  lower 

'   On  none  of  the   instruments    examined   was  The  length  of  the  strings  will  be  hereafter  given, 

there  a  machine   to  "  make  the  imitation  of  the  The  dimensions    of   the    specimen    in  the    South 

bassoon."  Kensington  Museum,  with  lever  action  and  twelve 

-The    following    are    the    dimensions    of   the  open  strings  are  : — Extreme  length,  2  feet  9  inches  ; 

specimen  illustrated,  which  has  ten  bass  strings:  width,  13j  inches. 

— Extreme  length,  33  inches  ;  width  of  sounding  ^  At  the  lower  end  of  the  instrument  there  is  a 

board,    14|  inches  ;  depth  of  body  at  lower  end,  box  for  strings,  and  at  the  upper  end  of  the  body 

4^  inches  ;  depth  of  body  at  the  centre,  5  inches.  a  small  box  in  which  the  tuning  key  is  kept. 


132  MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 

portion  of  the  strings ;  on  this  the  hand  is  placed  when  the  instrument 
is  being  played  upon. 

The  mechanism  which  moves  the  fork  action,  and  so  shortens  each 
of  the  bass  strings,  as  may  be  seen  by  the  plate,  is  somewhat  similar 
to  that  in  use  on  the  Single  Action  Harp,  but  reversed,  small  watch- 
springs  being  attached  to  the  "arbers"  which  move  each  of  the  seven 
lowest  forks  in  the  bass  ;  each  spring,  as  soon  as  the  atop  or  key  is 
released,  draws  one  or  two  forks  back,  and  so  releases  the  strings. 
This  mechanism  in  a  measure  resembles  that  of  the  Single  Action 
Harp,  but  the  tringles  of  that  harp  are  placed  side  by  side,  whereas 
in  the  small  head  of  the  Harp-Ventura,  there  not  being  sufficient 
depth  to  allow  of  such  an  arrangement,  Ventura  scattered  and  crossed 
the  tringles,  and  by  the  use  of  double  and  single  cranks  when 
necessary  produced  a  mechanism  with  comparatively  little  depth, 
which,  although  roughly  made,  answered  the  purpose  he  had  in 
view. 

If  the  reader  turns  to  the  illustration  and  follows  the  A|  stop 
from  the  crank  by  which  it  has  drawn  the  conductor  down,  he  will 
see  near  the  curve  the  connection  with  the  upper  A  fork ;  and, 
following  the  tringle  to  the  end,  the  watch-spring  will  be  seen 
tightened  round  the  "  arber "  to  which  the  lower  A  fork  is  attached. 
The  G  conductor  and  tringle  can  also  be  clearly  followed  to  a  double 
crank,  which,  on  account  of  the  direction  the  trixigle  has  had  to  take, 
is  necessary  to  turn  the  fork.  The  G,  B,  D  conductors  are  attached 
to  cranks  which  support  the  tringles  as  in  the  large  harp  ;  the  four 
others  appear  to  be  more  or  less  independent. 

To  the  reverse  of  the  plate  shown  in  the  illustration  seven  steel 
springs  are  attached ;  each  has  at  the  end  a  long,  sharp  tooth.  These 
teeth  pass  through  the  plate,  and  hold  the  stops  when  they  are 
pressed  home.  Each  stop  is  perforated  in  two  places ;  by  the  outer 
perforation  it  is  held  by  the  tooth,  but  through  the  inner  perforation 
a  brass  rod  passes,  then  through  a  hole  m  the  plate,  and  is  screwed 
into  the  steel  spring.  Each  rod  has  a  knob  at  the  outer  end ;  so 
when  a  knob  is  pressed,  the  spring  is  raised,  the  tooth  withdrawn,  the 
watch-spring  acts,  the  stop  is  released,  and  the  fork  ceases  to  grasp 
the   string.      On   the   plate    both   the   instrument   and   the   mechanism 


HARP-VENTURA    MECHANISM. 


No.     I -ACTION      BY     PRESSURE.      THE     B.    G,    AND     A     STOPS.     EACH    OF 
WHICH    SHORTEN    TWO    STRINGS.    ARE    FIXED. 


No.    II-LEVER    ACTION.     THE    LETTERS    INDICATE    THE    "ARBERS.'   TO 
THE    OTHER    ENDS    OF  WHICH   THE     'FORKS      ARE  SCREWED 


THE    HARP-VENTURA 


133 


are  shown  when  the  G,  B,  and  A  stop— each  of  which  shortens  two 
strings — are  fixed.  The  defect  of  this  mechanism  is  that  a  passing 
accidental  in  the  bass  cannot  be  produced  without  pressing  a  stop  or 
key,  or  releasing  a  stop  or  ke}^  by  pressing  a  knob  at  the  back,  as  the 
case  may  be,  and,  after  the  accidental  has  been  produced,  either  pressing 
a  knob  at  the  back  or  pressing  a  stop  or  key,  a  double  movement  which 
causes  such  delay,  that  if  a  passing  accidental  occurs  in  music  that  is  not 
exceptionally  slow  it  cannot  be  expressed. 

The  lever  action  is  different.  In  it  the  conductor  is  attached  to 
the  centre  of  the  lever;  the  spring  is  formed  like  the  letter  L.  To 
the  end  of  the  shorter  arm  A,  a  steel  wedge  or 
tooth  is  attached,  which  tooth  passes  through  the 
plate.  At  B,  at  the  junction  of  the  two  arms,  the 
rod   for    raising    the    spring   is    attached.       The    lever. 


^ 


when  pulled  down,  forces  the  wedge  or  tooth  up,  and  when  it  has 
passed  the  wedge  or  tooth,  the  spring  descends,  and  the  tooth  holds 
the  lever  in  its  place.  The  stop  is  released  by  pressing  the  knob 
which  raises  the  spring.' 

The  mechanism  is  ingenious.  The  stops  before  noticed,  which  may 
be  seen  on  both  illustrations,  are  marked  from  the  uppermost  down 
as  follows  :— First,  Eb  ;  second,  Bb  ;  third,  F#  ;  fourth,  C|  ;  fifth,  G#  ; 
sixth,  Djl ;  and  seventh,  A#.  This  indication,  which  is  wanting  on 
the  later  specimens  with  the  lever  action,'-  is  valuable  as  a  key ;  for, 
even  if  we  had  not  the  intimation  that  the  instrument  is  an  improved 
Harp-Lute,  there  could  have  been  no  doubt  that  the  Harp- Ventura 
was  intended  to  be  tuned  like  the  Harp-Lute  in  the  key  of  C. 


Scale  of  the  Harp- Ventura 


Open  strings. 


^M 


^ 


^ 


ISI  FlNGER-BOAAD. 


2nd  Finger-Boakd. 


^^ffl 


3rd 

0^ 


i 


'  The  length  of  the  downward  pull  in  this  lever  -  There    are    two    in    the     South    Kensington 

action   is  \^  of  an  inch  at  the  end  of  the  lever       Museum, 
outside  the  instrument. 


134 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


Chromatic  Scale  of  the  Open  or  Bass  Strings. 


W^ 


»[|^b»|Oft<>t.b«i^ 


1 


M 


^ 


«!l^^t^^,U>-lb.^oloHJ°ff-^ 


=4^ 


The  bars  include  the  notes  that  can  be  produced  from  each  string. 
The  instrument  being  tuned  in  the  key  of  C  major,  the  semibi'eves  show 
the  notes  to  be  produced  from  the  strings  in  their  natural  state,  the 
crotchets  the  notes  that  can  be  produced  from  the  strings  by  the  use 
of  the  keys  or  stops. 

As  Ventura,  as  already  mentioned,  claimed  to  have  invented  an 
Imperial  Harp-Lute,  and  was  a  professor  of  the  instrument,  and  as 
an  examination  of  the  music  published  by  him  shows  that  his  Harp- 
Lute,  unlike  that  of  Light,  was  tuned  as  the  Spanish  Guitar,  an 
octave  lower  than  the  written  notes,  or  to  the  pitch  of  the  piano, 
there  is  every  reason  for  supposing  that  the  Harp-Ventura,  which  is 
an  improved  Harp-Lute,  was  tuned  in  a  similar  manner.  So  the 
instrument  ^  being  furnished  with  suitable  strings,"  the  Harp- Ventura 
is  to  be  tuned  in  the  following  manner  : — 

Fix  the  first  and  second  stops,  which  are  marked  respectively  Eb 
and  Bb  ;  then  tune  the  strings  on  the  large  finger-board  to  C,  E,  G  ; 
on  the  second  finger-board  to  C,  E,  G,  an  octave  higher  ;  and  the  string 
on  the  third  finger-board,  C,  an  octave  higher.  Tune  the  bass  from 
the  open  strings  on  the  finger-board  and  from  the  frets  in  octaves 
downwards. 

The  instrument  being  now  in  the  original  key  of  C,  change  to  the 
other  major  keys  in  the  following  manner  : — 

To  play  in  F,  release  the  E  stop,  and  the  string  will  be  Eb. 

To  play  in  Bb,  release  the  E  and  B  stops,  and  the  strings  will  be 
Eb  and  Bb. 

To  play  in  0,  the  original  key,  ]3ress  the  Eb  and  Bb  stops. 


•  The  writer  believes  that  Ventura,  as  wull  as 
Wheatstone,  tuned  his  Imi)crial  Harp-Lute  an 
octave  lower  than  the  written  notes. 

2  One  of  these  instruments,  when  it  was  in 
the  writer's  possession,  had  the  original  strings, 
most  of  them  apparently  silk  and  wire.  These 
have  unfortunately   been  removed,  so  the    gauge 


cannot  be  given.  A  competent  string-maker  with 
the  scale  before  liini  should  be  able  to  spin  suitable 
strings  if  an  instrument  were  sent  to  him  for 
that  purpose.  The  writer  learns  from  a  noted 
manufacturer  of  Guitars,  that  Mr.  J.  G.  Winder, 
of  Kentish  Town  Road,  is  an  excellent  maker  of 
strings. 


THE    HAEP-VENTUEA 


135 


To  play  in  G,  press  the  Eb,  Bb,  and  F^  stops. 
To  play  in  D,  press  the  Eb,  Bb,  F#,  and  C#  stops. 
To  play  in  A,  press  the  Eb,  Bb,  F#,  C#,  and  G|f  stops. 
To  play  in  E,  press  the  Eb,  Bb,  Fjj,  cji,  G#,  and  D#  stops. 
To  play  in  B,  press  the  Eb,  Bb,  FJf,  €#,  GJ,  D#,  and  A#  stops. 

The  length  of  the  strings  upon  a  specimen  in  the  South  Kensington 
Museum  and  upon  the  specimen  illustrated : — 


NINETEEN 

STRINUS. 

SBVKNTEKN 

3TKINGS. 

3rd  Finger-board, 

8:^  inches. 

7f  inches. 

2nd 

Hi 

>3 

11t^    „ 

1st 

20 

JJ 

20i      „ 

OPEN   STRINGS 

NINETEEN 

STRINGS. 

SEVENTEEN   STRINGS. 

B 

22|^  inches. 

22^  inches. 

A 

22f 

23i      „ 

G 

23 

23| 

F 

23f 

24i 

E 

241 

25i 

D 

24f 

25| 

C 

25i 

26^ 

B 

25| 

27i 

A 

251 

27i 

G 

26| 

27 

F 

m 

No  string. 

E 

26f 

No  stri 

ng. 

On  the  Harp- Ventura  the  open  strings  are  closely  spaced,  and  it  is 
evident  that  it  was  the  intention  of  the  inventor  that  the  open  strings 
should  be  almost  always  struck  by  the  thumb.  The  position  of  the 
strings  as  they  pass  the  forks,  in  place  of  being,  as  is  usual,  in  the 
centre  of  the  fork,  being  more  to  the  right,  is  also  an  indication,  sa 
they  can  be  struck  with  force  by  the  thumb  without  jarring.  It  is 
scarcely  likely  that  the  open  strings  were  fingered  as  the  Pedal- 
Harp  or  Harp-Lute. 

Carl    Engel   states   that    Ventura    exhibited    his   invention    at   the 


136  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 

National  Repository,  Royal  Mews,  Charing  Cross,  when  he  played  upon 
it  in  public,  so  it  may  be  concluded  that  in  the  hands  of  an  accomplished 
guitarist  it  may  be  used  with  much  effect ;  but  it  is  heavy  and  rigid, 
and,  although  strong  in  tone,  is  wanting  in  the  harp-like  quality  for 
which  the  best  Harp-Lutes  and  Dital-Harps  are  noted. 

The  writer  believes  that  an  ingenious  mechanist  could  perfect 
Ventura's  lever  action  so  as  to  make  it  possible  to  produce  a  passing 
accidental  by  one  motion  of  the  thumb.  Were  that  accomphshed  (and 
this  is  worth  the  consideration  of  instrument -makers),  and  such 
mechanism  fitted  to  an  instrument  constructed  as  nearly  as  possible 
on  the  lines  of  the  beautiful  Harp-Lute  with  sixteen  strings  by 
Packer  of  Bath,  at  present  in  the  Donaldson  Museum,  with  widely 
spaced  strings  and  only  two  finger-boards,  and  the  tone  of  such  an 
instrument  equalled  that  of  the  best  Harp-Lutes,  an  instrument  vastly 
superior  in  form  and  tone  to  the  Spanish  Guitar,  or  to  any  of  the 
small  instruments  at  present  in  use,  would  be  the  result ;  for,  unques- 
tionably, an  instrument  with  thirteen  consecutive  open  strings,  which 
could  be  fingered  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Pedal-Harp,  would  have 
great  advantages  over  a  six-stringed  instrument  on  which  an  open 
string  is  only  occasionally  used. 

MUSIC 

The  writer  regrets  that  after  diligent  search  and  frequent  advertise- 
ments no  solo  for  the  Harp -Ventura  has  been  obtained.  Ventura 
certainly  intended  his  instrument  with  a  compass  of  four  octaves  for 
elaborate  pieces.  Three  songs  with  accompaniments  are  the  only  pieces 
of  music  available,  and  these  accompaniments,  although  simple,  tend 
to  prove  the  writer's  assertion  that  the  bass  is  to  be  played  by 
the  thumb.  Most  of  the  music  already  given  for  the  Harp-Lute  can  be 
played  upon  this  instrument. 


THE   HAEP-VENTURA 


137 


IVith  accompaniments  for  the    Harp-Ventura. 

BY  ANGELO  BENEDETTO    VENTURA. 


138 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


2 


^   yEJ^ETH^J^  C^J^^ZOJVETT^ 


D.Cerutti 


\d  lifaitina 


Canto 


*'  n.i    4 r.    J.,  rv ii_  r>:_    rv;_  r»;_   o.,. 


Harp  Ventura 


•  !'■  T.m 


M  tuo   fudo  Giaco      metto 


Din  Din  Din  Sentio   Ca. 


^ 


^A^^ 


-^-jp" 


'\d  libitnm 


Se 


«r     M' 


^■^ 


ALLEGRETTO  ESPRESSIKO 
^  -    J, 

•-a 


^ 


^^^^ 


'*  '    J. 


rrjrm 


r.  r  r 


m 


Jzrrtz 


.  re.  ta  ^    Mille     vol. -te      be.  .ne..de..-ta  sia  la  Mama   sia    la     Mama    ohe    ti 


f,    .f 


OTJ  -CTJ  h[ 


^ 


=^=F 


5P 


^•1  ^  '•  r-j;\  !'•;  i:-  g  ^^  ^''  i'.  J'  l^^ 


fe"'  Mille        vol.te      mil.  .le 


^^=^ 


♦ — •■ 


>:- 


ille        vol.te      mil.  .le        voL.te       be ne        de.-ta     sia         L« 


^'"^ihd-^ 


£= 


m 


^^ 


s 


?=^ 


J  r  r  "^  J'. 


m 


rr^  rr.  ^•' 


^^ 


p 


ITT)^*-     t^-- P^ 


Mama  sia  La  Mama cheti    fe"         sia      La  Mama  sia     LaMamacheti     fe' 


f=^ 


THE    HARP-VENTURA 


139 


1C=f5: 


^1 


r\ 


^ 


r\ 


^ 


f 


^ 


4: 


KL  Din  Din  chesenti    O    cara     /^  Nelrnio  petto       pur   io      sento  ^o^sono 


m 


TEr^W 


'^ 


Allejjrretto    Kspresaivo 


^0/ 


vi/ 


i^=i 


r  rTir-  '^  r  f-'i'"^  iv?  rg:-^^-^'^''^^^ 


matto    dal    conten 

Jt  -A. 


-to      qiiando   penso    quando   penso  Ninaa      ti 


$ 


^ 


^ 


^ 


-jf^r-p  1-.^  JJi'A^ 


J  r  r  ^ ;  ,ri 


1»— ^ !»■ 


^^ 


i^tto       sa.no    matn    dal   C(>u__ten to       quando       penso  quando     penso  Nina  a 


iV  h-Si 


llJ  '  t^uJl- 


U      4      '^ 


W 


uo 


USICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


6 


^UROR.^1  CHE  ^ORaSP.^! 
Tlie  Ceiebratecl  Song  in  the  Opera  La  Donna    Del    T,:<g;(,, 


r-^jvTO     fe 


Rossini 


^  J  .    jT  i.r 


fioi  ra pir  ho  bar ba ra  qitel 


ohe 


e        fioi  ra pir 


i. 


-•■ — =r-|»- 


■s=— T*- 


J      I        J 


)— 


^ 


THE    HARP-VENTUEA 


141 


I  (Ion        elie    el)!niio    <\» te 


1        r  1 


til..   |)ir. 


'^n'r*:  ^rrrfri'tri'rrr^rirfrhri'rrr^f  F 


^ 


»    « 


ij'  ^'   1'  faj  ai"^  I  ^j  f  Q-  ^  a* 


# 


ra  quel        don  che  ebb io  quel      don       che     ebliio    fla. 


dk  -,  f   ^   1      ^ — "p     I T I 


^1 


i 


^ 


^ 


i 


-te. 


j'^f --:l£L^T^^;:[rJ-  h!f-^^i 


^^ 


i 


^ 


3^=5^ 


142 


MUSICAL   INSTEUMENTS 


FELLS  SE  M,^S  PRETSJVBiI 


G.  Mili<-o 


C^J^^TO 


Fll le      se     mai      pre.,  ten  __.<li  O r,«       ehe        so. 

^^ '^         '-l^ 


-r  I  ^^?i  i^k^  ^^ 


^ 


J    J  J_^J^  I  J     ^     '      ^ 


N    % 


'^  ^  k'  1 1^  ?•  r 


# '  * 


Sappi 


<-h'i()     son     fi'un     j{e_.ni_-o 


i 


i 


^^Et 


J         J    % 


WW 


■zt 


THE   HAEP-VENTUEA 


143 


P 


CO ^i  vi_va ce     e     Li lie.ri)  ohe 


t^m-^LMj'^TO^^^-i^^'^^P 


i 


m 


# 


T 


no  no  no  no 


f    f    i°rrr['rr^rr*r*^ 


^ 


^m 


w 


w 


'p'^\'\  iffj 


^. 


f         m 


1 


P 


no     no  non  non  non    mi        so 


tur. 


-bar. 


144 


MUSICAL   INSTEUMENTS 


EG  A  N   S     PO  RTA  BL  E     HARP 


EGAN'S    PORTABLE    HARP 

While  Light  and  others  were  producing  small  instruments,  the  tone 
of  which  resembled  that  of  the  Pedal- Harp,  John  Egan,  of  30  Dawson 
Street,  Dublin,  a  celebi'ated  Harp-maker,^  invented  a  Harp  of  moderate 
size,  but  one  which,  although  portable,  is  certainly  not  portable  in  the 
same  sense  as  the  instruments  that  have  already  been  described.  Egan's 
instrument,  the  Royal  Portable  Irish  Harp,  has  much  of  the  form  of  the 
old  Irish  Harp  ;  it  has  the  curved  fore-pillar,  but  as  it  is  small,  pedals 
could  not  be  supplied,  so  Egan's  invention  was  the  placing  of  seven  stops 
or  keys  on  the  inner  side  of  the  curved  fore-pillar,  each  of  which, 
when  drawn  down  by  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand,  shortens  a 
number  of  strings,  and  so  the  key  can  be  changed  without  difficulty 
or  a  passing  accidental  produced.  These  stops  are  arranged  in  the 
following  order— A,  E,  B,  F,  C,  G,  D. 

The  earliest  of  these  instruments  the  writer  has  seen  is  No.  4, 
and  dated  1819.  It  has  thirty-four  strings,  but  three  sti'ings  in  the 
bass  are  without  the  fork  action.  One  in  the  possession  of  Countess 
Plunkett  has  thirty  strings,  one  string  in  the  treble  and  one  in  the  bass 
without  fork  action.  One  illustrated  has  thirty-two  strings  ;  the  two 
lowest  bass  strings  are  without  the  fork  action.  One  in  the  Donaldson 
Museum,  No.  1904,  reign  of  George  iv.,  has  thirty-three  strings,  all 
with  fork  action.  One  with  stand,  No.  1920  of  the  same  period,  has 
the  same  number  of  strings,  all  with  fork  action.  A  few  others  the 
writer  has  seen  or  heard  of,  but  considering  the  number  manufactured, 
Egan's  Harp  is  not  often  to  be  met  with. 

Dr.  Culwich,  in  his  valuable  lecture  upon  Irish  Melody,  writes  as 
follows  :  "  Perhaps  the  best  evidence  of  the  final  and  complete  surrender 
of  Irish  music  to  the  encroachments  of  modern  methods  is  the  Harp 
made  by  John  Egan  of  Dawson  Street,  early  in  this  century.  This 
had  a  full  set  of  modulating  keys  worked   by  a  set  of  cranks    to  all 

'  Egan  is  stated  to  have  invented  a  double-movement  Harp,  and  also  a  tri[ile-action  Harp. 

T 


146  MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 

intents  and  purposes  exactly  like  the  early  Pedal-Harps." '  Egan's 
instrument,  which  is  only  Irish  in  form,  supjjlied  to  some  extent  a  want. 
The  Harp,  be  it  remembered,  was  perhaps  the  most  favourite  instrument 
of  the  period,  so  an  instrument  which  could  with  ease  be  conveyed 
where  no  Pedal- Harp  was  likely  to  be  found,  was  an  advantage.  Egan's 
Harp,  unlike  the  true  Irish  Harp,  is  strung  with  gut,  and  although  it 
has  the  mechanism  referred  to,  any  person  attempting  to  play  upon  it 
will  find  that  a  large  portion  of  the  music  published  by  Bunting  is  as 
unsuitable  for  it  as  for  the  wire-strung  Irish  Harp. 

On  Egan's  Harp,  to  produce  a  passing  accidental,  the  left  hand 
must  drop  the  strings,  and  only  a  practised  performer,  who  can  con- 
centrate his  or  her  attention  upon  the  bass  strings,  for  the  time  being, 
can  replace  the  left  hand  in  the  proper  position  without  slowing 
the  time.  Music  in  which  the  melody  occurs  in  the  bass,  while 
the  accompaniment  (in  which  accidentals  occur)  is  in  the  treble,  is 
inadmissible,  and  music  in  which  an  accidental  occurs  in  the  treble, 
when  the  bass  is  of  importance,  is  equally  so.  Still,  much  beautiful 
music  can  be  altered  and  arranged  to  suit  this  instrument,  which, 
although  it  has  not  the  power  of  the  Pedal- Harp,  has  almost  the  same 
sweetness  of  tone."  Egan  had  imitators,  and  the  writer  has  seen  an 
early  imitation  by  Serguet,  a  London  maker.  Now  that  there  is  a 
seeming  revival  of  the  Harp,  this  little  instrument  is  in  some  demand, 
and  is  again  being  made  by  Messrs.  Holderness  of  Oxford  Street, 
London,  by  whom  a  number  have  been  despatched  to  America. 

Egan's  Harp  has  usually  a  button  or  stud  screwed  to  the  right 
side  of  the  comb  and  another  to  the  front  of  the  lower  portion  of 
the  fore-pillar,  to  which  a  band  is  attached,  by  which  band,  when 
passed  over  the  right  shoulder,  the  Harp  is  suspended.  It  also 
usually  has  a  wooden    rod  which,  when   drawn    out    to    the    necessary 

'   lu  a  complimentary  notice  of  this  instrument  ^  On  theSth  Septemlier  1821,  Mr.  C.  N.  Bochsa, 

which  appeared  in  the  London   Monthly  Literary  a  very  eminent  harpist  and   composer,  wrote  to 

Register  and  Review  of  the  Fine  Arts,  November  Mr.  Egan  as  follows  :   "  1  have  great  pleasure  in 

1822,  the  writer  refers  to  it  as  an  "  improvement  informing  you,   the   Royal  Port.able   Irish  Harp 

on  the   simple,    old  Irish   Harp,    in   rendering  it  invented    by    you    has    my  decided  ai)probation. 

equal   to  the   Pedal-Harp,  without  sacrificing  its  Its    peculiar    sweetness    of    tone,    so    admirably 

glorious  nationality;  it  was  incapable  of  making  adapted  for   accompanying  the  voice,    the    great 

accidental  Mats  or  sharps  till  Mr.  Kgan'a  invention  facility  of  clianging  the  keys,  and  its  portability 

of  the  Royal  Portable  Irish  Harp,"  etc. — Reprinted  make  it  a  desirable  instrument  to  proficients  on 

in  Royal  Harp  Director,  by  Charles  Egan.  the  Pedal-Harp." — Ibid. 


EGAN'S    POETABLE    HAEP  147 

length  and  fastened  by  a  screw  at  the  back,  supports  the  Harp. 
One  instrument  in  the  writer's  possession  has  a  wooden  stand  with 
feet  attached  to  the  end  of  an  iron  rod,  which,  although  it  renders 
the  instrument  less  portable,  is  certainly  an  advantage,  for  without 
such  a  stand  the  instrument  has  no  proper  support.  These  Harps 
were  generally  supplied  in  leather  cases,  and  were  probably  not  removed 
from  their  cases  except  for  use.  Very  prettily  decorated  some  of  these 
instruments  are,  gold  shamrocks  being  nicely  arranged  on  a  black,  blue, 
or  pea-green  ground. 

Small  Harps  of  the  same  form,  but  without  mechanism,  were  also 
made ;  these  had  loop  stops  to  the  strings  by  which  the  key  could  be 
changed.  Some  are  very  artistically  decorated,  even  more  so  than  any 
of  Egnn's  the  writer  has  examined. 

As  the  strings  of  Egan's  Harps  were  not  always  of  the  same 
length,  and  also  differed  in  length  from  those  of  the  Single  Action 
Harp,  and  as  it  is  not  desirable  that  these  little  instruments  should 
be  subjected  to  the  same  tension  as  the  Pedal-Harp,  strings  should  be 
specially  selected  for  each.  As  some  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
stringing  of  these  instruments,  the  following  refei'ence  to  the  strings 
that  have  been  found  to  answer  may  be  of  use. 

On  No.  1920,  the  lowest  string  in  the  bass,  Eb,  measures  32  inches, 
the  cori'esponding  string  on  a  Single  Action  Hai-p  measures  49  inches. 
The  highest  string  in  the  treble,  Bb,  measures  2^  inches,  the  corre- 
sponding string  on  a  Single  Action  Harp  measures  3f  inches.  The 
following  strings  have  been  found  to  answer  : — 

For  Eb,  B,  silver  and  silk.  For  Bb,  C,  5th  octave. 

For  F,  C,  copper  and  silk.  For  C,  D,  5th  octave. 

For  G,  D,  silver  and  silk.  For  D,  E,  5th  octave. 

For  Ab,  B,  gut  5th  octave.  For  Eb,  G,  4th  octave. 

After  which,  strings  gauged  one-third  higher  than  the  same  note  upon 
Erard's  gauge  are  suitable.  For  an  instrument  the  lowest  string  in 
the  bass,  Eb,  which  measures  38  inches,  and  the  highest  string  in  the 
treble,  Ab,  which  measures  3|-  inches;  the  corresponding  string  on  the 
Single  Action  Harp  measures  4^  inches.  Different  strings  should  be 
selected,  and  the  writer  suggests,  as  the  principal  difficulty  is  likely  to 


148  MUSICAL    INSTIIUMENTS 

occur  with  the  lowest  bass  strings,  that  A,  B,  and  C  silk  and  wire  without 
steel  centre  should  be  tried ;  the  C  first  for  the  E  b  string,  and  if  not 
suitable  moved  to  F  or  G.  The  B  and  A  strings,  respectively,  tested 
as  Eb  and  moved  up  if  necessary.  The  same  with  the  gut  strings 
up  to  the  second  Eb,  after  which  strings  gauged  a  note  higher  than 
the  same  note  upon  Erard's  gauge  will  be  found  suitable.  The  chief 
difficulty  will  be  found  to  occur  in  the  bass.  The  upper  portions  of 
several  of  the  bass  strings,  as  may  be  seen  by  the  illustration,  cross  a 
portion  of  the  fore-pillar,  and  even  when  the  correct  strings  are  selected, 
a  performer  cannot  pull  these  bass  strings  with  the  same  force  that 
may  be  applied  to  the  others  without  making  the  strings  jar  against 
the  fore-pillar ;  so  strings  that  wUl  give  as  much  tone  as  can  be 
expected,  when  so  near  the  end  of  the  sounding-board,  and  will  not 
jar  when  pulled  with  moderate  force,  are  those  that  are  required. 

MUSIC 

Charles  Egan  was  the  "  Author  of  Instructions  for  the  Boyal  Portable 
Irish  Harp,"  during  or  before  1822.  A  number  of  national  lyrics  were 
arranged  for  the  instrument  by  the  same  person,  who  appears  to  have 
been  Professor  of  the  Harp  to  H.R.H.  the  Princess  Augusta,  and  also 
Harpist  to  the  Queen.  This  selection  was  published  by  J.  Egan, 
30  Dawson  Street,  Dublin,  in  1826.  In  the  part  the  writer  has 
examined  there  are  eight  pieces,  of  which  Nos.  1  and  7  are  Irish  airs. 
No.  7  has  been  reproduced  ;  but  as  Moore's  words,  "  The  Harp  that  once 
through  Tara's  Hall "  are  now  so  associated  with  the  melody,  they  have 
been  substituted  for  those  entitled  "  The  Death  of  Cai'olan,"  supplied  by 
Edward  Dowling. 

The  writer  has  also  selected  a  Venetian  air,  "  Stance  di  pascolar," 
with  some  of  the  effective  variations  by  V.  Fiorini  occasionally  slightly 
altered.  This  piece  has  been  selected  for  the  purpose  of  showing  the 
class  of  music  that  can  be  executed  by  a  fairly  proficient  performer. 
Irish  melodies,  however,  without  accidentals,  such  as  those  arranged 
by  Dr.  Culwich  and  Mr.  Owen  Lloyd,  also  Songs  of  Ireland  without 
words,  arranged  by  J.  T.  Surenne,  eighty  of  which  are  without  acci- 
dentals, if  transposed  when  necessary,  will  be  found  still  more  suitable. 


EGAN'S    PORTABLE    HARP 


149 


THE  HARP  THAT  ONCE  THROUGH  TARA'S  HALL. 


WORDS  BY  THOMAS  MOOSE. 


THE  AOOOMPANIMENT,   ETC.,   BY   CHARLES   EOAN. 


y 


VOCE 


ffl 


ADAGIO  con  Esprestione 


The        Harp     that  once      ihio'      Ta         ras   halls.       The 


Soul       of      Mil  -  sif    shed.     No«   hangs   as    mute    on     Ta  -  ra  s  w.ills  .\s        if  that  soul  wuti-Htcl     So 


Nutional     Lyrics.    (C;    Epan) 


1  without  «ei1ou.  luiury  to  Moore',  bwiutlhil  wonl..  tlw  (ollowlng  line  might  ho  .iihrtltutc.l :  "  Now  rMts  at  mote  «lthlu  tho,...  .«11,. 
■n.e  Coltic  harp  was  plarod  on  the  lj»ct  of  the  hon  when  not  In  uie  Im  '■  X\x  Irieh  and  the  Highland  Hun>..'  pp.  Sd,  M.  luO). 


150 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


THE  HARP  THAT  ONCE  THROUGH  TAKA'S  HALL. 


r      '     r 

National    Lyrics. 


Lyrics'.         (C;  Eg-an) 


EGAN'S    POETABLE    HARP 


151 


THE  HARP  THAT  ONCE  THROUGH  TARA'S  KAth. 


L-iiord      a     -    lone,     that   breaks    ai      night        Its  talc       of        ru     ■     in         tells  Thus 


n  n  )i  ^  L 


Efc=»= 


F=f^=t  1^  J'^ 


ES^^ 


¥^ 


when     sonieheatt     m      dig      nnnt  breaks,  Tu         show     that     slill     she      lives 


National    Lyrics.    (  C;  Eg-an) 


152 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


THE     LEGACY 


AKBANGED  BY  R.  SCHBOEDES. 


ANDANTEV'*^ 


ia^\ff^-j-li-J-|J-j-l^^j-li-j^ 


;^^M4jlc^ 


ff^^T^f^iff^ 


m 


^^^^^^=^^^ 


^^ 


■  1  =^ 


^ 


-p — 1  1  -i 


^=^ 


r  1  1     1 


5= 


J 


I;    M  rr 


s. 


frfff|tf?4!r]7Cfff|Lffr^ 


l^^ic  d- 1  [iJ  r  -ffg^rrJ^  ,r^  i  .^  ,0^ 


'^Vrf^ftfit^g 


I"     — ri* —    p 


EGAN'S    PORTABLE    HAEP 


163 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAE. 


VARIATIONS    BY  V.    FIORINI. 


Andante 

CON 
EsPRESSlONE 


m,i^i\:\j!jj\^[^!\\s^U^^\ 


,m  '» 


y'Ui  ^  iji^'ij^p 


^^ 


1 


j^'iii'^u  n,tV,f||  rff  i^iji'i^^ 


f'le  ;i>  jm.i  .r -'"trf  YiTirf^m 


jVif^^Jr-'^piii 


rniJ .  j,J^ 


^P 


T 


;'Vi,[^^Cj:-^l''li'cD^I^/^Jl^J'-^ 


^ 


'/'•'''  f  •  ''lH'j'^  "^""SS 


i^ 


Stanco  di  pascolar  . 


154 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAR. 


Var:  1. 


'§M\^  [j^}l  I  \  !^!^  Ute^^l-^g^  M 


'Vii^ur    UC^^LT-^nT^ 


EGAN'S    PORTABLE    HARP 


155 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAR. 


^ 


^4^^=L 


i\-^^\j-^  O'^  ^^m 


1    r 


[ji''ijj  7  h Q^jj^^ta£i^.r£nfc# 


156 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


6 


Va  k:S . 


fe^ 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAR. 


m 


^ 


^ 


Sempre  piano 


j'li.m  ;  ri  I  r^  .n^  ;^^ij^m 


Stjnco   <li   pascotar 


EGAN'S    POKTABLE    HAKP 


157 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAE. 


V  A  r:G. 


^-.mj  JiPj^^ 


Ui>  poco  pin  lento  e    Sostennto 


1  iilTT^  T  fn- 


r^^^^^fe 


Stanco  di  pascolar 


IN  THIS  VARIATION  PLAY  C*  FOR  D>. 


158 


MUSICAL    INSTKUMENTS 


a 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAE. 


St.Mx  f>  (I  i  p.iKooTar 


EGAN'S    PORTABLE    HARP 


159 


STANCO  DI  PASCOLAE 


Staiico  di  pascoTar 


160 


MUSICAL    INSTRUMENTS 


MV    LODGING. 


ARRANGED  BY  R.  8CHR0EDER. 


FEELING 


..„jf-''^ii.uii7ijgi,jrii^~ipii]i]jiiii'j^,ni 


^ 


^ 


rpk*; .  "^1 

r^F^ 

^^4TfFt=rr#F^=^ 

W=i 

=i^  ^  ^zMz  :3^M= 

J^t^fiit^- 

.^^•b'i(i  "(i  -^  i|  -^  J  -^  If  rr  •"  I j  -^  j: 


^= 


111 


f'W:-i^lW?tf^^'l'^J"^ 


¥  V  f 


^ 


i 


g    i     !■    ^: 


r     1 


T     I     'C 


P      ^     P 


?=* 


r=f^- 


YE    BANKS   AND   BRAES, 


ARRANQED  BY  R.  80HR0EDEB. 


ANDANTE. 


j:i."Hij.^pijPlji;ii|?]£nifjjiijffl 


F^Fg?i 


^ 


i 


a..  1  < 


J  ^  J  ^   iJ  1   r  ^   iJ 

^  ^  'it  r  i 


fe 


iji'"iPi^iiF^pijqiBygj.iffit^i^'fc 


^ 


^ 


^ 


p 


^ 


=^=s=^ 


=^=—2? 


1    J    M 


r=f 


I       I        'I        '^        'I: 


^^^^g^4^^^^-pw^ij:^piMi/ii 


]^ 


p 


f 


T.l-,jy 


fr-^  =  =5ati5? 


F 


r=p 


ADDENDA 

THE   APOLLO   LYRE 

In  the  Royal  Scottish  Museum,  Edinburgh,  there  is  one  of  these  instru- 
ments. The  finger-board  is  without  the  usual  supports,  and  there  are 
no  "  horn  "  terminations.  Upon  it  is  the  following  label,  "  R.  Wornum, 
Inv''.  &  Maker,  Wigmore  St.,  London."  In  the  Victoria  and  Albert 
Museum  there  is  a  specimen  with  a  stand,  "  horn "  terminations,  and 
supports.  It  has  seven  strings,  and  is  by  the  same  maker,  Hanover  St., 
Cavendish  Square.  The  Lyre,  amongst  the  same  collection,  which  is 
stated  to  have  belonged  to  Marie  Antoinette,  has  eight  strings. 

HARP-LUTE-GUITAR 

A  specimen  in  the  Victoria  and  Albei't  Museum  has  upon  it 
"  Hariby,  Maker." 

LUTE 

Under  the  heading  "Light,  Edward,"  in  British  Musical  Biography, 
by  James  D.  Brown  and  Stephen  S.  Chatton,  the  following  occurs : 
"Concise  instructions  for  playing  on  the  English  Lute,"  London. 

HARP-VENTURA 

By  the  kind  permission  of  the  authorities  of  the  Victoria  and 
Albert  Museum,  the  writer  has  been  able  to  add  a  representation  of 
the  instrument  with  the  Lever  Action,  and  also  a  representation  of 
the  Lever  Mechanism. 


INDEX 


INDEX 


AcoucRTPTOPHONE,  or  Encliajited  Lyre,  69  fool- 
note. 

Air,  with  various  accompaniments,  for  the  Guitare- 
Harpe,  45. 

Alaw,  Bardd,  author  of  the  Welsh  Harper,  69 
footnote. 

Apollo  Lyre,  the,  32,  33. 

.Specimen  iu  the  Royal  Scottish  Museum, 

Edinburgh,  of  the,  161. 

Augusta,  Princess,  jiupil  of  Charles  Egan,  148. 

Barry,  maker  of  Harp-Guitars,  25. 

Bayard,  music  for  the  Guitare-Harpe  bj',  46. 

Bland,  J.,  17. 

Bochsa,  C.  N.,  harpist  and  composer,  146. 

Bolton,  Thomas,  composer  for  the  Guitar,  17,  31, 

33,  SO. 
Bremner,    John,     Instruction-book    for    English 

Guitar,  by,  8. 
Bremner's  Tutor,  picture  of  lady  playing  English 

Guitar  iu,  7. 
British  Lute-Harp,  97  (plate). 

Music  published  for  the,   115,  116. 

Busby,  Dr.  Thomas,  25. 

Concert- Room  Anecdotes  by,  f>  footnote, 

73  footnote,  101. 

Cadences  for  the  Harpe-Lute,  74. 

Dital  Harp,  113,  114. 

Caledonian  Mercury  of  1815,  Musical  Advertise- 
ment in  the,  77,  78. 

'  Capo-tasto,'  5,  31,  44. 

CaruUi,  Instructions  for  Spanish  Guitar  by,  33. 

Chabran,  F.,  33. 

Instructions  for  Harp. Guitar  by,  27. 

Cheltenham  and  Bath,  R.  L.  Downes,  Professor 
of  Music  at,  79. 

Clements,  Bangor,  and  Co.,  Publishers,  30. 

Concert-Room  Anecdotes,  5  footnote. 

Cousineau,  stops  on  Pedal  Harp  used  by,  67. 

Culwick,  Dr.,  145,  148. 

DiBDiN,  Songs  of,  with  Guitar-settings,  6. 
Dital  Harp,  97  (plate). 

Cadences  on  the,  113,  114. 

Diagram  of  Strings  on  the,  103. 


Dital  Harp,  Exercises  and  Airs  for  the,  110-113, 
117-128. 

Finger-board  of  the,  103. 

Lady  playing  upon  the  Patent,  100. 

Mechanism  of  the,  102. 

Scales  on  the,  109. 

97,  103,  104  (plates). 

Ditals,  or  Thumb-keys,  98. 

Donaldson  Museum,  136. 

Egan's  Portable  Harp  in,  145. 

Harp-Lute  in  the,  70  (plate). 

Dowling,  Edward,  148. 

Downes,  R.  L.,  Professor  of  Music  at  Chelten- 
ham and  B.ath,  79. 

writer  of  music   for  the   Harp  -  Lute, 

09,  70. 

Dublin,  National  Portrait  Gallery  at,  5. 

Edinburgh,  Keyed  Guitars  in,  14. 

University,  Instrument  in,  30,  31. 

Egan,  Charles,  Instructions  for  the  Royal  Port- 
able Irish  Harp  by,  148. 
John,  Portable  Harp  by,  144  (plate). 

Portable  Harp,  Melodies  for,  149-160. 

Engel,  Carl,  32,  135. 

English  Guitar,  Claus  and  Co.  patent  keyed,  15. 

Instruction    Book,    by    Bremner,    for 

the,  8. 

Keyed,  in  Ediaburgh,  14  (plate). 

Melodies  for  the,  18-24. 

Music  published  for  the,  16,  17. 

Picture  of  lady  playing  the,  7. 

Pitch  of  the,  13. 

Scales  for  the,  5. 

Smith's  patent  box  for,  15. 

Specimens  of  the,  by  Preston,  Perry, 

and  Gibson,  4,  6. 

FiNGER-BOARP  and  Scales  of  the  Harp-Lute,  73. 

of  the  Harp-(iuitar,  28. 

of  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar,  57. 

Fitzgerald,  S.  J.  A.,  80  footnote. 

Galpin,  Rev.  F.  W.,  Harp-Lute-Guitar  in  collec- 
tion of,  53  footnote. 
Gibson,  W.,  Guitar  by,  6. 
Gibson  and  Woffington,  makers  of  (iuitars,  6. 

166 


166 


MUSICAL    INSTEUMENTS 


Glen,  Harp-Lute-Guitar  in  collection  of  Messrs. 

J.  and  R.,  53  footnote. 
Grisi  and  Mario,  with  the  Harp-Lute,  76  (plate). 
Guildhall  Exhibition,  1895,  5. 
Guitare-Harpe,  41. 
Air  with  various  accompaniments  for 

the,  45. 

— — Melodies  for  the,  47-52. 

Music  published  for  the,  46. 

Guitar,  Carulli's  Instructions  for  the  Spanish,  .33. 
Complete  Tutor,  by  Oswald,  for  the  Kaglish, 

8. 

Diagram  of  Finger-board  of  the  English,  9. 

Guitar,' the  Spanish,  2. 

Harp,  Egan's  Portable,  described,  145,  146. 

Specimens  noticed,  145. 

Strings  for,  147. 

Harp-Guitar,  24  (plate). 

Finger-board  for  the,  28. 

Improved  by  Levien,  29. 

Instructions  by  F.  Chabran  for  the,  27. 

made  by  A.  Barry,  25. 

Melodies  for  the,  34-40. 

Picture  of  lady  playing  the,  27. 

Harp-Lute,  as  represented  by  artists,  114. 

Cadences  for  the,  74. 

Described,  69, 

Directions  for  stringing  the,  71,  72. 

•  Finger-board  and  scales  of  the,  73. 

Grisi  and  Mario  with  the,  76  (plate). 

Instructions  for  the  improved,  31. 

Light's  Instructions  for  the,  80a,  SOh. 

Melodies  for,  81-96. 

•  Music  published  for  the,  806. 

with  sixteen  strings,  70  (plate). 

Stops  used  on  the,  67- 

Thumb-key  for  G -string  on  the,  80o. 

Tuning  of  the,  70. 

Twelve-stringed,  66  (plate). 

with  fourteen  strings,  68  (plate). 

Harp-Lute-Guitar,  art  of  playing  on  the,  53. 

•  the,  52  (plate),  53. 

Finger-board  of  the,  57. 

in  collection  of  Messrs.  J.  and  R.  Glen, 

53  footnote. 

—  Rev.  P.  W.  Galpin's  Collection,  53  fool- 
note. 

Music  published  for  the,  56. 

Preludes,  etc.,  for  the,  58-66. 

Scale  of  the,  54. 

Specimens  by  Hariby,  of  the,  161. 

Harp-Lyre,  invented  by  Edward  Light,  the,  77. 

the,  78  (plate). 


Harp,  Portable,  144  (plate). 
Harpsichords,  Kirkman,  maker  of,  5. 
Harp- Ventura,  128  (plate). 
described,  131. 

Canzonets  for  the,  138-143. 

Mechanism,  132  (plate). 

Scales  of  the,  133,  134. 

Specificatiou  for  the,  120. 

Hatton,  J.  L.,  77. 

Haxby,  R.,  17. 

Holderuess  (Messrs.),  London,  Harp-makers,  146. 

Houston,  R.,  engraver,  5. 

Jones,  G.  ,  article  Music,  by,  5  footnote. 

Diagrams  of  a  Harp-Guitar  by,  29. 

Journet,  H.,  London,  30,  H  footnote. 

Kirkman,  Harpsichord-maker,  5. 

Levien,  Mordacnt,  of  London,  26,  41. 

Light,  E.  G.,  Instruction  Book  to  the  Harp-Lute- 
Guitar,  5. 

Edward,  Inventor  of  musical  instruments, 

25  footnote. 

His  place  of  residence  ;  his  first  instru- 
ment the  Harp-Guitar,  25  ;  his  second  instru- 
ment the  Harp-Lute-Guitar,  53  ;  his  third 
instrument  the  Harp- Lute,  67  ;  his  fourth  in- 
strument the  Harp-Lyre,  77  ;  his  fifth  instru- 
ment the  British  Lute-Harp,  afterwards  called 
the  Dital  Harp,  97. 

Longman,  Lukey  and  Co.,  Music  Publishers,  17. 

Lute,  scale  of  the,  from  Chabran,  30. 

Lute-Harp,  Britisli,  or  Dital-Harp,  97  (plate). 

Music   jjublished  for  the  British,  115, 

116. 

Lyre,  in  Royal  Scottish  Museum,  Edinburgh,  an 
Apollo,  161. 

— —  Music  published  for  the,  33. 

said  to  have  belonged  to  Marie  Antoinette, 

161. 

the  Apollo,  32,  33. 

the  French,  33. 

Lyres,  32. 

Marella,  Guitar-player  and  composer,  16. 
Marie  Antoinette,  Lyre  said  to  have  belonged  to, 

161. 
Melodies  tor  the  Dital  Harp,  119-128. 

for  Egan's  Portable  Harp,  149-160. 

for  the  Harp-Lute,  81-96. 

Guitare-Harp,  47-52. 

—  Knglish  Guitar,  18-24 

Harp-Guitar,  34-40. 

Moore,  79. 


INDEX 


167 


Morley,  J.  G.,  30. 

Music  published  for  the  British  Lute-Harp,  115, 
116. 

English  Guitar,  16,  17. 

Harp-Lute,  806. 

Guitare-Harpe,  46. 

Harp-Lute,  79. 

Harp-Lute-Guitar,  56. 

Harp-Ventura,  138-143. 

Lyre,  3.3. 

NiECK.s,  Professor,  2G  Jhotnole. 

Oswald,  J.,  Guitar  Tutor  by,  15,  16. 

Packer,  <j.,  of  Bath,  improvement  of  Harp-Lute 

by,  68,  136. 
Pan-}',  John,  69. 
Perry,  James,  Guitar-maker,  H  footnote. 

English  Guitar  by,  6. 

Poole,  T.,  maker  of  a  Harp-Lute,  71  footnotf. 
Powell,  Miss  Harriet,  portrait,  by  Reid,  5. 
Preludes,  etc.,  for  the  Harp-Lute-Guitar,  58-66. 
for  the  English  Guitar,  18-22. 

for  the  Guitare-Harpe,  43. 

for  the  Harp- Lute,  76. 

for  the  Dital  Harp,  117. 

Preston,  of  London,  English  Guitar  by,  6. 
Pyne,  Dr.  Kendriok,  SO. 

J.  Kendriok,  Catalogue  of  Musical  Instru- 
ments by,  41  footnote. 

Regency  Harf-Lute,  the,  79. 

Reid,  C. ,  portrait  of  Miss  Powell  by,  5. 

Reynolds,  portrait   of  Hon.  Mrs.  Charles  Yorke 

by,  5. 
Rutherford,  David,  16. 


Scales  and  Finger-board  of  the  Guitar-Harpe, 

42,  43. 

on  the  Dital-Harp,  lU'J. 

Serguet,  maker  of  the  Portable  Harp,  146. 
Smith,  patent  box  attachment  for  English  Guitar 

by,  15. 
St.  Martin's  Lane,  London,  2. 
Steuart,  Neil,  16. 
Stewart,  Sir  Robert  P.,  1. 
Stops  used  on  French  Pedal  Harp,  67. 
the  Harp-Lute,  67. 

Thackray,  Airs  by,  for  the  English  Guitar,  17. 
Theorbo,  or  double-headed  Lute,  30. 
Thompson,  C.  and  S. ,  publishers,  17. 
Thumb-key  for  G-string  on  the  Harp-Lute,  80a. 
Trinity  College,  Dublin,  1. 
Tuning  of  the  Harp-Lute,  70. 

Ventura,  32,  69,  70,  71. 

Victoria  and  Albert  Museum,  2,  15,  25. 

Harp-Lute-Guitar   in   the, 

161. 

Wales,  Princess  Charlotte  of,  taught  by  Ven- 
tura, 79. 

Walsh,  J.,  16. 

Wheatstone,  C,  additions  to  Harp-Lute  by,  68. 

Instructions   for    the    improved   Harp-Lute 

by  John  Parry,  31. 

Wilson,  William,  publisher,  17. 

Woffington,  English  Guitar-maker,  6  footnote. 

Wornum,  R.,  inventor  and  maker  of  the  Apollo 
Lyre,  161. 

Yorke,  the  Hon.  Mrs.  Charles,  portrait  by 
Reynolds  of,  109. 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  Constable,  Printers  to  His  Majesty 
at  the  Edinburgh  University  Press 


ERRATA 

P.  6,  20th  line,  delete  "Thomas." 

P.  76,  title  of  Plate,  for  "  Gresi "  read  "  Grisi." 

P.  132,  last  line,  delete  "both  the  instrument  and." 

P.  133,  1st  line,  for  "are"  read  "is." 

P.  145,  5th  line  from  foot,  read  "Culwick." 

P.  148,  3rd  line  from  foot,  read  "Culwick.'' 


'Wr^:^^ 


ii*:-.2VW*